專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷（通用8套）

　　在日復一日的學習、工作生活中，我們總免不了要接觸或使用試卷，作為學生，想要成績提升得快，那么平時就一定要進行寫練習，寫試卷，你知道什么樣的試卷才能切實地幫助到我們嗎？下面是小編收集整理的專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷（通用8套），歡迎大家分享。

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷1

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need themto complete a gap-filling task after the mini-lecture. When the lecture is over, you will be given two minutes to check your notes, and another ten minutesto complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE. Some of the gaps may require a maximum of THREE words. Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are) both grammatically and semantically acceptable. You may refer to your noteswhile completing the task. Use the blank sheet for note-taking.

　　Now, listen to the mini-lecture.

　　Classifications of Cultures

　　According to Edward Hall, different cultures result in different ideas about the world. Hall is an anthropologist. He is interested in relations between cultures.

　　I. High-context culture

　　A. feature

　　- context: more important than the message

　　- meaning: (1)__________

　　i.e. more attention paid to (2) ___________ than to the message itself

　　B. examples

　　- personal space

　　- preference for (3)__________

　　- less respect for privacy / personal space

　　- attention to (4)___________

　　- concept of time

　　- belief in (5)____________ interpretation of time

　　- no concern for punctuality

　　- no control over time

　　II. Low-context culture

　　A. feature

　　- message: separatefromcontext

　　- meaning: (6)___________

　　B. examples

　　- personal space

　　- desire / respect for individuality / privacy

　　- less attention to body language

　　- more concern for (7)___________

　　- attitude toward time

　　- concept of time: (8)____________

　　- dislike of (9)_____________

　　- time seenas commodity

　　III. Conclusion

　　Awareness of different cultural assumptions

　　- relevance in work and life

　　e.g. business, negotiation, etc.

　　- (10)_____________ insuccessful communication

　　參考答案：

　　(1) context of message

　　(2) whats happening / the context

　　(3) closeness to people

　　(4) body language

　　(5) poly-chronic

　　(6) message itself

　　(7) the message

　　(8) mono-chronic

　　(9) lateness

　　(10) great influence / significance

　　TIPS：

　　(1) 根據(jù)原文中一句“A high-context culture is a culture in which the context of the message, or the action, or an event carries a large part of its meaning and significance.”可知答案。

　　(2) 根據(jù)原文“What this means is that in a high-context culture, more attention is paid to whats happening in and around the message than to the message itself.”可知答案。

　　(3) 根據(jù)原文“Generally speaking, in a high-context culture, because this greater dependency on group thinking, people lean towards heavier sense of involvement or closeness to people.”可得出答案。

　　(4) 根據(jù)原文“And also peoplefroma high-context culture pay attention to body language.”可得出答案。

　　(5) 根據(jù)原文“People in high-context cultures, are considered to have, what is called a poly-chronic attitude toward time.”可得出答案。

　　(6) 根據(jù)原文“A low-context culture is one in which the message, the event or the action is a separate entity, having meaning onto itself, regardless of the surroundings or the context.”可得出答案。

　　(7) 根據(jù)原文“And youll also see that people might pay less attention to body language, because as I said, the message is, the message is everything.”可得出答案。

　　(8) 原文提到在low-context culture中，人們對時間的態(tài)度可稱為mono-chronic。

　　(9) 根據(jù)原文“People in a low-context culture would be much more upset with lateness, because they feel that everyone should follow the same time.”可得出答案。

　　(10) 根據(jù)文章末尾部分“If youre in business, negotiations, interpersonal relations, if youre dealing with peoplefromdifferent cultures in any way, its going to affect every part of your life. In any multi-cultural situation, these assumptions need to be taken into account for successful interactions.”可知，在商務(wù)活動、談判、人際交往中，與來自不同文化的人打交道時，這些想法對成功的交際起著非常重要的作用。

　　script:

　　Classifications of Cultures

　　Good morning, everyone! Today, well look at culture or rather classifications of cultures. Usually, when we deal with different people, we deal with them as if we were all members of the same culture. However, its possible that peoplefromdifferent cultures have different assumptions about the world. We got in such important and basic ideas as time, personal space. And this is the view of Edward Hall. And Edward Hall is an anthropologist who spent a large part of his life studying American Indians, their culture, their language. But he was differentfroma lot of other anthropologists who just study one culture. He was interested in the relations between cultures, how cultures interact. What Hall believes is that cultures can be classified by placing them on a continuum, rangingfromwhat he called high-context to low-context.

　　OK, what is a high-context culture? A high-context culture is a culture in which the context of the message, or the action, or an event carries a large part of its meaning and significance. What this means is that in a high-context culture, more attention is paid to whats happening in and around the message than to the message itself.

　　Now, let me give you examples. First, in terms of personal space. Generally speaking, in a high-context culture, because this greater dependency on group thinking, people lean towards heavier sense of involvement or closeness to people. And they have less respect for privacy, for personal space. If you go into that culture, people might stand closer when theyre talking to you. They might touch more. And if theyre jostled in a crowd, they wont feel violated. And also peoplefroma high-context culture pay attention to body language. Because remember what I said, the definition of a high-context culture is that more attention is paid to the context of the message than to the message itself. And part of the context is body language.

　　Second, in terms of time. People in high-context cultures, are considered to have, what is called a poly-chronic attitude toward time. Here, "poly" means multiple and "chronic" means time. What this means is that they believe people, things, events have their own time. And there cant be a standard system of time for everything. What this leads them to believe is that you cant emphasize punctuality. Things happen when they are supposed to happen. So, theres a different attitude toward time; theres no set standard of time; you cant control time; everything has its own sense of time. So its a culture that pays little attention to time, to clock time.

　　Now, lets move on to low-context culture. A low-context culture is just theopposite. A low-context culture is one in which the message, the event or the action is a separate entity, having meaning onto itself, regardless of the surroundings or the context. That the message, the event, the action has meaning in itself. So what this means in a low-context culture, is that people pay more attention to the event itself rather than to the context which surrounds the event or the message. For example, in terms of personal space again, theres more emphasis on individuality. So the concept of privacy is very, very important. Whereas before, as I said, in a high-context culture, they might not even be concerned with privacy or personal space. But in a low-context culture, theres a feeling that we each have our own personal space. If you get too close, if you dont knock on doors before entering, thats an invasion of privacy. People feel violated. Theres a respect and a desire for privacy. And youll also see that people might pay less attention to body language, because as I said, the message is, the message is everything. They are not going to worry about all the details around it. What you say is the important thing, or what you do is the important thing.

　　Another example of a low-context culture is peoples attitude towards time. In terms of time, I said before, there was a poly-chronic sense of time in a high-context culture. What do you think there would be in a low-context culture? Mono-chronic? Right! A mono-chronic sense of time and by that we mean that theres one time. And that concept means that people in a low-context culture believe that theres one standard of time. And that should be for everything. And so I am not willing to hear "Oh, the traffic was heavy. Thats why Im late" or "Oh, I slept late". People in a low-context culture would be much more upset with lateness, because they feel that everyone should follow the same time. There shouldnt be all this flexibility with time and they expect punctuality. And they look at time as almosta commodity that they use expressions like "use time, to waste time, to spendtime or time is money". All of these expressions reinforce the concept that time is actually something you can hold on to.

　　So, what this is all about is that, Hall stresses that people need to be aware of these different assumptions or concepts about reality. And he thinks that this has all kinds of relevance no matter what youre doing. If youre in business, negotiations, interpersonal relations, if youre dealing with peoplefromdifferent cultures in any way, its going to affect every part of your life. In any multi-cultural situation, these assumptions need to be taken into account for successful interactions.

　　OK, today weve taken a brief look at Edward Halls view of culture, mainly his classification of high- or low-context culture with some examples. Next week, well look at some more examples of cultures on a continuum between high-context and low-context cultures.

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW/CONVERSATIONIn this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Questions 1 to 5 are based on an interview. At theendof the interview you will be given 10 seconds to answer each of the following five questions.

　　Now, listen to the interview.

　　1. According to Dr. Harley, what makes language learning more difficult after a certain age?

　　A. Differences between two languages.

　　B. Declining capacity to learn syntax.

　　C. Lack of time available.

　　D. Absence of motivation.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：答案選B。Harley博士提到有研究表明，語言特別是句法方面的學習在12歲以后更難。

　　2. What does the example of Czech speakers show?

　　A. Its natural for language learners to make errors.

　　B. Differences between languages cause difficulty.

　　C. There exist differences between English and Czech.

　　D. Difficulty stemsfromeither difference or similarity.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：答案選D。Harley博士提到有研究發(fā)現(xiàn)學習英語的捷克人會在相同的捷克語和英語句法上犯錯，因此證明了語言學習者的困難也可能來自相似性。

　　3. Which of the following methods does NOT advocate speaking?

　　A. The traditional method.

　　B. The audiolingual method.

　　C. The immersion method.

　　D. The direct method.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：答案選A。因為其他三種方法都要求或強調(diào)口語，而傳統(tǒng)方法強調(diào)語法教學。

　　4. Which hypothesis deals with the role of language knowledge in the learning process?

　　A. The acquisition and learning distinction hypothesis.

　　B. The comprehensible input hypothesis.

　　C. The monitor hypothesis.

　　D. The active filter hypothesis.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：答案選C。當Harley博士在解釋monitor hypothesis時，他提到monitor會使用語法規(guī)則，電臺主持人向他確認是否這意味著學習者運用語言知識確保所說和所寫的正確無誤，Harley博士的回答是肯定的。

　　5. Which of the following topics is NOT discussed during the interview?

　　A. Causes of language learning difficulties.

　　B. Differences between mother tongue and a second language.

　　C. Theoretical conceptualization of second language learning.

　　D. Pedagogical implementation of second language teaching.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：答案選B。其他三項在對話中均有提及，D項沒有提及。

　　script:

　　Woman: Good morning, Dr. Harley! Thank you very muchfor coming on our radio talk. We know that youre an applied linguist specializing in second language acquisition.

　　Dr. Harley: Right!

　　Woman: So, today, um, well look at this issue. Now, first, Dr. Harley, could you please tell us what is second language acquisition?

　　Dr. Harley: Well, second language acquisition is ... happens when a child or adult has alreadybecome competent at a language. And then, um, they attempt to learn another.

　　Woman: OK, most people think, including me, it is difficult to learn another language. What are the reasons? Why is it so?

　　Dr. Harley: Well, there are a number of reasons for this. Huh, first, there have been research studies. They have shown that some aspects of language learning especially syntax are more difficult beyond a certain age, say, after around 12 years of age.

　　Woman: So, age plays an important role in language learning?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes. But thats not the only reason.

　　Woman: Oh, is that so?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, for example, huh, time and interest. All children and adults often have less time and motivation to learn a second language.

　　Woman: Mm …

　　Dr. Harley: Another is related to the similarities and differences between ones mother tongue and a second language. We find the learners will experience difficulty when their mother tongue and the second language theyre learning differ. In general, the more idiosyncratic a feature is in a particular language relative to other languages, the more difficult it will be to acquire.

　　Woman: Perhaps this is the key issue. Differences between languages cause language learning problems.

　　Dr. Harley: Well, this may be one of the issues here. But this cannot be the whole story, as not all differences between languages cause difficulty. Let me give you an example.

　　Woman: OK.

　　Dr. Harley: Research has found that many errors by Czech speakers learning English were made on syntactic constructions in which the two languages do not differ.

　　Woman: Oh, really? The picture ismore complicated than weve imagined.

　　Dr. Harley: Definitely yes. Each language learning situation is different. So reasons vary a lotfromcase to case.

　　Woman: Now, Dr. Harley, since learning a second language is a difficult process, you know, in one way or another, are there any methods so far, effective methods to teach a second language?

　　Dr. Harley: There again, no method is absolutely effective in all situations. Some may prove effective, others may not. I mean all depending on specific conditions. But generally speaking, there are a number of methods that have been used to teach a second language.

　　Woman: Could you mention a few?

　　Dr. Harley: For instance, theres the traditional method. This method is based on translationfromone language to another. And it emphasizes grammar teaching. And then you have direct methods which focuses on conversational skills and all teaching must be carried out in the second language.

　　Woman: Oh, I see. Any other methods?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, for example, the audio-lingual method. This method emphasizes speaking and listening before reading and writing.

　　Woman: How interesting!

　　Dr. Harley: Then you have the immersion method. This method teaches learners exclusively through the medium of the second language.

　　Woman: How?

　　Dr. Harley: Well, it simply means that you cannot speak mother tongue. Everything must be done in the language youre learning. To me, the most natural method of learning a new language is what I call submersion. That is, to go to that country and be surrounded exclusively by speakers of that language.

　　Woman: Thank you very much Dr. Harley for introducing some of the language teaching methods. Now lets move on to something a bit theoretical. Since second language acquisition and teaching are a fascinating area for researchers, are there any theories to explain second language acquisition?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, many theories and models have been put forward by researchers so far. Today, Id like to mention the five hypotheses proposed by Steven Krashen.

　　Woman: OK.

　　Dr. Harley: The five hypotheses form what he calls the Monitor Model of second language learning.

　　Woman: What does it mean?

　　Dr. Harley: OK, the first hypothesis is the Acquisition and Learning Distinction Hypothesis. According to Krashen, children acquire their first language largely unconsciously and automatically. But adults could only learn a second language consciously and effortfully. And adults could indeed acquire the second language, at least in part.

　　Woman: Right. Then whats his second hypothesis?

　　Dr. Harley: His second hypothesis is the Natural Order in Acquisition Hypothesis. Basically, he means that the ordering which learners acquire syntactic rules is the same in both languages.

　　Woman: Oh, thats something really new to me.

　　Dr. Harley: The third hypothesis is the Monitor Hypothesis, which is central to his theory. Here again,we come across the distinction between acquisition and learning. According to this hypothesis, the acquisition processes create sentences in the second language, right? But learning enables the development of a monitoring process to check and edit this output. The monitor uses knowledge of the rules. Thats why, as I said just now, learning is a conscious process.

　　Woman: This means in learning you use knowledge of the language to make sure what you say or write is correct. Is that so?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes. His fourth hypothesis is the Comprehensible Input Hypothesis. In order to move form one stage to the next, the learner must understand the meaning and the form of the input. This emphasizes the roleof comprehension. And finally, the Active Filter Hypothesis. This suggests attitude and emotional factors are also important in second language acquisition.

　　Woman: I guess Krashens model has provided a useful framework for second language learning.

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, it indeed has. And it has also proved to be one of the most influential theoretical approaches to teaching a second language.

　　Woman: OK, Dr. Harley, thank you once again for talking to us about second language acquisition.

　　Dr. Harley: Pleasure.

　　SECTION C NEWS BROADCASTIn this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Question 6 is based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 10 seconds to answer the question.

　　Now, listen to the news.

　　6. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT?

　　A. Greyhound is Britains largest bus and train operator.

　　B. Currently Greyhound routes in Britain are limited.

　　C. The coach startsfromLondon every hour.

　　D. Passengers are offered a variety of services.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。新聞中提到First Groups是英國最大的汽車和火車運營商，而Greyhound是其下的美國品牌。

　　script:

　　The 95-year old iconic American brand — Greyhound is taking to the British roads. First Group, Britains largest bus and train operator, and owner of the Greyhound coach brand in the U.S., said the buses would start runningfromLondon Victoria to Portsmouth and Southampton on Sept. 14. Tickets will cost as little as 1 with the average journey costing 7. It plans to roll out more routes next year. The hourly bus service will take just under two hours non-stop and will offer free Wi-Fi, power sockets for each passenger, air-conditioning, complimentary newspapers and leather seats.

　　Questions 7 and 8 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions.

　　Now, listen to the news.

　　7. What does the news item say about the fires in Greece?

　　A. Fires only occurred near the Greek capital.

　　B. Fires near the capital caused casualties.

　　C. Fires near the capital were the biggest.

　　D. Fires near the capital were soon under control.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：答案選D。由“Authorities reported 75 fires across the country.”可排除A。由“No injuries were reported.”可排除B項。C項未提及。

　　8. According to the news, what measure did authorities take to fight the fires?

　　A. Residents were asked to vacate their homes.

　　B. Troops were brought in to help the firefighters.

　　C. Air operations and water drops continued overnight.

　　D. Another six fire engines joined the firefighting operation.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。新聞提到調(diào)動空軍、海軍協(xié)助滅火，故B項正確。

　　script:

　　Greek firefighters planned to continue to work through the night to contain dozens of wild fires, including a massive blaze outside Athens, authority said. Greek Prime Minister, Kostas Karamanlis, called for calm on Saturday and said ground forces will continue their superhuman efforts until dawn, when air operations and water drops will resume. Authorities reported 75 fires across the country. The fires began late Friday in Grammatiko 40 kilometers (25 miles) northeast of the capital. Wind whipped a single blaze into three fires, which joined again Saturday. No injuries were reported. Authorities mobilized unitsfromthe navy, air force and marines to assist the firefighters in Grammatiko, the State Fire Department said. "The fire isparticularly complex, given the weather, the large quantity of fuel, the terrain and the proximity of residential areas," a statementfromthe Fire Department said. The cause of the original fire which belched clouds of heavy dark smoke was unknown, and officials were investigating. Forest and bush firesare common during Greeces hot, dry summers. Six firefighting aircraft were helping firefighters, according to the Athenss news agency.

　　Questions 9 and 10 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions.

　　Now, listen to the news.

　　9. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as a cause of the current decline in the Mexican economy?

　　A. Fewer job opportunities in Mexico.

　　B. Strong ties with the U.S. economy.

　　C. Decline in tourism.

　　D. Decline in tax revenues.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。新聞提到墨西哥經(jīng)濟衰退的主要原因是其與美國經(jīng)濟聯(lián)系甚密。另外，導致墨西哥經(jīng)濟衰退的原因還包括旅游業(yè)下滑和石油、稅收的減少，只有A項不是原因。

　　10. Drop in remittancesfromabroad is mainly due to _________.

　　A. declining oil production

　　B. the outbreak of the H1N1 flu

　　C. the declining GDP in Mexico

　　D. the economic downturn in the U.S.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。新聞提到“RemittancesfromMexicans working abroad, most of them in the United States, also have fallen victim to the economic downturn.”，故D項正確。

　　script:

　　The Mexican economy went off a cliff in the second three months of2009, with the gross domestic product dropping 10.3%fromthe same period last year, according to government figures. Analysts say the main cause of Mexicos nosedive is that the nations economy is tied strongly to that of the United States, which is mired in the deepest economic downturn since the 1930s. Other factors dragging the Mexican economy down include a tourism decline caused by the H1N1 flu outbreak, declining oil and tax revenues and fewer Mexicans abroad sending money back home. Oil revenues, long Mexicos main source of money, have been hurt by lower global prices and declining production. RemittancesfromMexicans working abroad, most of them in the United States, also have fallen victim to the economic downturn. Fewer jobs in the United States means fewer opportunities for Mexicans to find work and sendmoney home. Remittances rank after oil in terms of revenue for the country. That revenue fellfrom$26 billion in2007to $25 billion in2008, Mexicos Central Bank said, and is expect to decrease even more this year. Tourism, Mexicans third largest source of revenue, has declined steadily since an outbreak of the H1N1 flue was first discovered in Mexico in April.

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION

　　In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of 20 multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　TEXT A

　　Whenever we could, Joan and I took refuge in the streets of Gibraltar. The Englishmans home is his castle because he has not much choice. There is nowhere to sit in the streets of England, not even, after twilight, in the public gardens. The climate, very often, does not even permit him to walk outside. Naturally, he stays indoors and creates a cocoonof comfort. That was the way we lived in Leeds.

　　These southern people, on the other hand, look outwards. The Gibraltarian home is, typically, a small and crowded apartment up several flights of dark and dirty stairs. In it, one, two or even three old people share a few ill-lit rooms with the young family. Once he has eaten, changed his clothes, embraced his wife, kissed his children and his parents, there is nothing to keep the southern man at home. He hurries out, taking even his breakfast coffee at his local bar. He comes home late for his afternoon meal after an appetitive hour at his café. He sleeps for an hour, dresses, goes out again and stays out until late at night. His wife does not miss him, for she is out, too — at the market in the morning and in the afternoon sitting with other mothers, baby-minding in the sun.

　　The usual Gibraltarian home has no sitting-room, living-room or lounge. The parlour of our working-class houses would be an intolerable waste of space. Easy-chairs, sofas and such-like furniture are unknown. There are no bookshelves, because there are no books. Talking and drinking, as well as eating, are done on hard chairs round the dining-table, between a sideboard decorated with the best glasses and an inevitable displaycabinetfull of family treasures, photographs and souvenirs. The elaborate chandelier over this table proclaims it as the hub of the household and of the family. "Hearth and home" makes very little sense in Gibraltar. Ones home is ones town or village, and ones hearth is the sunshine.

　　Our northern towns are dormitories with cubicles,by comparison. When we congregate — in the churches it used to be, now in the cinema, say, impersonally, or at public meetings, formally — we are scarcely ever man to man. Only in our pubs can you find the truly gregariousand communal spirit surviving, and in England even the pubs are divided along class lines.

　　Along this Mediterranean coast, home is only a refuge and a retreat. The people live together in the open air — in the street, market-place. Down here, there is a far stronger feelingof community than we had ever known. In crowded and circumscribed Gibraltar, withits complicated inter-marriages, its identity of interests, its surviving sense of siege, one can see and feel an integrated society.

　　To live in a tiny town with allthe organization of a state, with Viceroy (總督), Premier, Parliament, Press and Pentagon, all in miniature, all within arms reach, is an intensive course in civics. In such an environment, nothing can be hidden, for better or for worse. Ones successes are seen and recognized; ones failures are immediately exposed. Social consciousness is at its strongest, with the result that there is a constant and firm pressure towards good social behaviour, towards courtesy and kindness. Gibraltar, with all its faults, is the friendliest and most tolerant of places. Straightfromthe cynical anonymity of a big city, we luxuriated in its happy personalism. We look back on it, like all its exiled sons and daughters, with true affection.

　　11. Which of the following best explains the differences in ways of living between the English and the Gibraltarians?

　　A. The family structure.

　　B. Religious belief.

　　C. The climate.

　　D. Eating habit.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章對英國人和直布羅陀的居民的不同生活方式進行描寫，對比了兩種迥異的社會習俗和社會結(jié)構(gòu)。

　　12. The italicized part in the third paragraph implies that ____________.

　　A. English working-class homes are similar to Gibraltarian ones

　　B. English working-class homes have spacious sitting-rooms

　　C. English working-class homes waste a lot of space

　　D. the English working-class parlour is intolerable in Gibraltar

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。斜體字部分的含義是“英國工人階級的會客廳對直布羅陀的居民來說是一種不能容忍的對空間的浪費”。

　　13. We learnfromthe description of the Gibraltarian home that it is _________.

　　A. modern

　　B. luxurious

　　C. stark

　　D. simple

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。文章提到直布羅陀的居民家里沒有安樂椅、沙發(fā)、書柜等類似的家具，因此很簡樸。

　　14. There is a much stronger sense of _______ among the Gibraltarians.

　　A. togetherness

　　B. survival

　　C. identity

　　D. leisure

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章好幾處的用詞如congregate、gregarious、communal spirit等都體現(xiàn)了直布羅陀人彼此之間較親密。

　　15. According to the passage people in Gibraltar tendto be well-behaved because of the following EXCEPT _______.

　　A. the entirety of the state structure

　　B. constant pressurefromthe state

　　C. the small size of the town

　　D. transparency of occurrences

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。A、C、D在文章中均有提及，只有B錯誤，直布羅陀只是一個小城鎮(zhèn)，不是一個state。

　　TEXT B

　　For office innovators, the unrealized dream of the "paperless" office is a classic example of high-tech hubris (傲慢). Todays office drone is drowning in more paper than ever before.

　　But after decades of hype, American offices may finally be losing their paper obsession. The demand for paper used to outstrip the growth of the US economy, but the past two or three years have seen a marked slowdown in sales — despite a healthy economic scene.

　　Analysts attribute the decline to such factors as advances in digital databasesand communication systems. Escaping our craving for paper, however, will be anything but an easy affair.

　　"Old habits are hard to break," says Merilyn Dunn,a communications supplies director. "There are some functions that paper serves where a screen display doesnt work. Those functions are both its strength and its weakness."

　　In the early to mid-1990s, a booming economy and improved desktop printers helped boost paper sales by 6 to 7 percent each year. The convenience of desktop printing allowed office workers to indulge in printing anything and everything at very little effort or cost.

　　But now, the growth rate of paper sales in the United States is flattening by about half a percent each year. Between2004and2005, Ms. Dunn says, plain white office paper will see less than a 4 percent growth rate, despite the strong overall economy. A primary reason for the change, says Dunn, is that for the first time ever, some 47 percent of the workforce entered the job marketafter computers had already been introduced to offices.

　　"Were finally seeing a reduction in the amount of paper being used per worker in the workplace," says John Maine, vice president of a pulp and paper economic consulting firm. "More information is being transmitted electronically, and more and more peopleare comfortable with the information residing only in electronic form without printing multiple backups."

　　In addition, Mr. Maine points to the lackluster employment market for white-collar workers — the primary driver of office paper consumption for the shift in paper usage.

　　The real paradigm shift may be in the way paper is used. Since the advent of advanced and reliableoffice-network systems, data storage has moved awayfrompaper archives. The secretarial art of "filing" is disappearingfromjob descriptions. Much of todays data may never leave its original digital format.

　　The changing attitudes toward paper have finally caught the attention ofpaper companies, says Richard Harper, a researcher at Microsoft. "All of a sudden, the paper industry has started thinking, We need to learn more about the behavioural aspects of paper use," he says. "They had never asked, theyd just assumed that 70 million sheets would be bought per year as a literal function of economic growth."

　　To reduce paper use,some companies are workingto combine digital and paper capabilities. For example, Xerox Corp. is developing electronic paper: thin digital displays that respond to a stylus, like a pen on paper. Notations can be erased or saved digitally.

　　Another idea, intelligent paper, comesfromAnoto Group. It would allow notations made with a stylus on a page printed with a specialmagnetic ink to simultaneously appear ona computer screen.

　　Even with such technological advances, the improved capabilities of digital storage continue to act against "paperlessness," argues Paul Saffo, a technology forecaster. In his prophetic and metaphorical 1989 essay, "The Electronic Piata (彩罐)," he suggests that the increasing amounts of electronic data necessarily require more paper.

　　The information industry today is like a huge electronic piata, composed of a thin paper crust surrounding an electronic core," Mr. Saffo wrote. The growing paper crust "is most noticeable, but the hidden electronic core that produces the crust is far larger — and growing more rapidly. The result is that we arebecoming paperless, but we hardly notice at all."

　　In the same way that digital innovations have increased paper consumption, Saffo says, so has video conferencing — with its promise of fewer in-person meetings — boosting business travel.

　　"Thats one of the great ironies of the information age," Saffo says. "Itsjust common sense that the more you talk to someone by phoneor computer, it inevitably leads to a face-to-face meeting. The best thing for the aviation industry was the Internet."

　　16. What function does the second sentence in the first paragraph serve?

　　A. It further explains high-tech hubris.

　　B. It confirms the effect of high-tech hubris.

　　C. It offers a cause for high-tech hubris.

　　D. It offers a contrast to high-tech hubris.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章第一句話“對辦公室的創(chuàng)新者來說，‘無紙’辦公室這一尚未實現(xiàn)的夢想是一種典型的高科技傲慢表現(xiàn)”，第二句話接著說“今天的辦公室正逐漸被有史以來最多的紙淹沒”，這正是傲慢的表現(xiàn)和后果，因此是證實了high-tech hubris。

　　17. Which of the following is NOT a reason for the slowdown in paper sales?

　　A. Workforce withbetter computer skills.

　　B. Slow growth of the US economy.

　　C. Changing patterns in paper use.

　　D. Changing employment trends.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章第二段第二句提到“過去，人們對紙的需求增長超過美國經(jīng)濟的增長速度，但在近兩三年里，盡管有健康的經(jīng)濟局面，紙張銷售卻產(chǎn)生了明顯下降”，因此B項正確。

　　18. The two innovations by Xerox Corp. and Anoto Group feature ________.

　　A. integrated use of paper and digital form

　　B. a shiftfrompaper to digital form

　　C. the useof computer screen

　　D. a new style of writing

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章第十一段提到，為了減少用紙，一些公司致力于將數(shù)字和紙的性能相結(jié)合，接著以Xerox Corp.和Anoto Group為例進行了說明，因此A項正確。

　　19. What does the author mean by irony of the information age"?

　　A. The dream of the "paperless" office will be realized.

　　B. People usually prefer to have face-to-face meetings.

　　C. More digital data use leads to greater paper use.

　　D. Some people are opposed to video-conferencing.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。文章倒數(shù)第二段中論述道“數(shù)字化的革新實際上增加了紙的消耗”，因此選C。

　　20. What is the authors attitude towards "paperlessness"?

　　A. He reviews the situationfromdifferent perspectives.

　　B. He agrees with some of the people quoted in the passage.

　　C. He has a preference for digital innovations.

　　D. He thinks airlines benefit mostfromthe digital age.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章第三段第二句話，作者認為不能忽略人們對紙的渴求，并在接下來的段落里引用Merilyn Dunn的話加以證明。在文章結(jié)尾的四段中，作者也多處引用Paul Saffo的話，認為更多的靠科技手段沒有減少反而增加了人們對紙的使用。

　　TEXT C

　　When George Orwell wrote in 1941 that England was "the most class-ridden country under the sun", he was only partly right. Societies have always had their hierarchies, with some group perched at the top. In the Indian state of Bihar the Ranveer Sena, an upper-caste private army, even killed to stay there.

　　By that measure class in Britain hardly seems entrenched (根深蒂固的). But in another way Orwell was right, and continues to be. As a new YouGov poll shows, Britons are surprisingly alert to class — both their own and that of others. And they still think class is sticky. According to the poll, 48% of people aged 30 or over say they expect toendup better off than their parents. But only 28% expect toendup in a different class. More than two-thirds think neither they nor their children will leave the class they were born into.

　　What does this thing that people cannot escape consist of these days? And what do people look at when decoding which class someone belongs to? The most useful identifying markers, according to the poll, are occupation, address, accent andincome, in that order. The fact thatincome comes fourth is revealing: though some of the habits and attitudes that class used to define are more widely spread than they were, class still indicates something less blunt than mere wealth.

　　Occupation is the most trusted guide to class, but changes in the labour market have made that harder to read than when Orwell was writing. Manual workers have shrunk along with farming and heavy industry as a proportion of the workforce, while the number of people in white-collar jobs has surged. Despite this striking change, when they were asked to place themselves in a class, Brits in2006huddled in much the same categories as they did when they were asked in 1949. So, jobs, which were once a fairly reliable guide to class, havebecome misleading.

　　A survey conducted earlier this year by Expertian shows how this convergence on similar types of work has blurred class boundaries. Expertian asked people in a number of different jobs to place themselves in the working class or the middle class. Secretaries, waiters and journalists were significantly more likely to think themselves middle-class than accountants, computer programmers or civil servants. Many new white-collar jobs offer no more autonomy or better prospects than old blue-collar ones. Yet despite the muddle over what the markers of class are these days, 71% of those polled by YouGov still said they found it very or fairly easy to figure out which class others belong to.

　　In addition to changes in the labour market, two other things have smudged the borders on the class map. First, since 1945 Britain has received large numbers of immigrants who do not fit easily into existing notions of class and may have their own pyramids to scramble up. The flow of new arrivals has increased since the late 1990s, multiplying this effect.

　　Second, barriers to fame have been lowered. Britains fast-growing ranks of celebrities — like David Beckham and his wife Victoria — form a kind of parallel aristocracy open to talent, or at least to those who are uninhibited enough to meet the requests of television producers. This too has made definitionsmore complicated.

　　But many Brits, given the choice, still prefer to identify with the class they were born into rather than that which their jobs orincome would suggest. This often entails pretending to be more humble than is actually the case: 22% of white-collar workers told YouGov that they consider themselves working class. Likewise, the Expertian survey found that one in ten adults who call themselves working class are among the richest asset-owners, and that over half a million households which earn more than $191,000 a year say they are working class. Pretending to be grander thanincome and occupation suggest is rarer, though it happens too.

　　If class no longer describes a clear social, economic or even political status, is it worth paying any attention to? Possibly, yes. It is still in most cases closely correlatedwith educational attainment and career expectations.

　　21. Why does the author say "...Orwell was right, and continues to be" (Paragraph Two)?

　　A. Because there was stronger class consciousness in India.

　　B. Because more people hope toendup in a higher class.

　　C. Because people expect to gain more wealth than their parents.

　　D. Because Britons are still conscious of their class status.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。George Orwell說英國是“世界上階級劃分最明顯的國家”，而后文也提到英國人對階級很敏感，因此D項正確。

　　22. ...class still indicates something less blunt than mere wealth" (Paragraph Three) means that ________.

　　A. class is still defined by its own habits and attitudes

　　B. class would refer to something more subtle than money

　　C. peoplefromdifferent classes may have the same habits or attitudes

　　D.income is unimportant in determining which class one belongs to

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。該句話的含義是“階級不僅僅意味著財富的多少，它還體現(xiàn)著一些不那么直接的東西”，因此B項表述正確。

　　23. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT?

　　A. White-collar workers would place themselves in a different class.

　　B. People with different jobs may place themselves in the same class.

　　C. Occupation and class are no longer related with each other.

　　D. Changes in the workforce have made it difficult to define class.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。文章第三段提到，在判定某人所屬的階級時，英國人常常用到幾個標準，其中第一個便是職業(yè)，可見職業(yè)和階級是緊密聯(lián)系的。

　　24. Which of the following is NOT a cause to blur class distinction?

　　A. Notions of class by immigrants.

　　B. Changing trends of employment.

　　C. Easy access to fame.

　　D. Fewer types of work.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。其他三項在第六、七、四段中均有提及。

　　25. When some successful white-collar workers choose to stay in the working class, it implies that they are _________.

　　A. showing modesty

　　B. showing self-respect

　　C. expressing boastfulness

　　D. making an understatement

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章倒數(shù)第二段中提到，很多英國人傾向于將自己歸屬于出生時的階級，而不是與自己的職業(yè)和收入相匹配的階級，他們常常表現(xiàn)出更謙遜的一面，因此A項正確。

　　TEXT D

　　The train was whirling onward with such dignity of motion that a glancefromthe window seemed simply to prove that plains of Texas were pouring eastward. Vast flats of green grass, dull-hued spaces of mesquite and cactus, little groups of frame houses, woods of light and tender trees, all were sweeping into the east, sweeping over the horizon, a precipice.

　　A newly married pair had boarded this coach at San Antonio. The mans face was reddenedfrommany days in the wind and sun, and a direct result of his new black clothes was that his brick-coloured hands were constantly performing in a most conscious fashion. From time to time he looked down respectfully at his attire. He sat with a hand on each knee, like a man waiting in a barbers shop. The glances he devoted to other passengers were furtive and shy.

　　The bride was not pretty, nor was she very young. She wore a dress of blue cashmere, with small reservations of velvet here and there, and with steel buttons abounding. She continually twisted her head to regard her puff sleeves, very stiff, and high. They embarrassed her. It was quite apparent that she had cooked, and that she expected to cook, dutifully. The blushes caused by the careless scrutiny of some passengers as she had entered the car were strange to see upon this plain, under-class countenance, which was drawn in placid, almost emotionless lines.

　　They were evidently very happy. "Ever been in a parlor-car before?" he asked, smiling with delight.

　　"No," she answered; "I never was. Its fine, aint it?"

　　"Great! And then after a while well go forward to the dinner, and get a big lay-out. Fresh meal in the world. Charge a dollar."

　　"Oh, do they?" cried the bride. "Charge a dollar? Why, thats too much — for us — aint it, Jack?"

　　"Nor this trip, anyhow," he answered bravely. "Were going to go the whole thing."

　　Later he explained to her about the trains. "You see, its a thousand milesfromoneendof Texas to the other; and this runs right across it, and never stops but four times.” He had the pride of an owner. He pointed out to her the dazzling fittings of the coach; and in truth her eyes opened wider and she contemplated the sea-green figured velvet, the shining brass, silver, and glass, the wood that gleamed as darkly brilliant as the surface of a pool of oil. At oneenda bronze figure sturdily held a support for a separated chamber, and at convenient places on the ceiling were frescos in olive and silver.

　　To the minds of the pair, their surroundings reflected the glory of their marriage that morning in San Antonio; this was the environment of their new estate; and the mans face in particular beamed with an elation that made him appear ridiculous to the Negro porter. This individual at times surveyed themfromafar with an amused and superior grin. On other occasions he bullied them with skill in ways that did not make it exactly plain to them that they were being bullied. He subtly used all the manners of the most unconquerable kind of snobbery. He oppressed them. But of this oppression they had small knowledge, and they speedily forgot that infrequently a number of travelers covered them with stares of derisive enjoyment. Historically there was supposed to be something infinitely humorous in their situation.

　　"We are due in Yellow Sky at 3:42," he said, looking tenderly into her eyes.

　　"Oh, are we?" she said, as if she had not been aware of it. To evince (表現(xiàn)出) surprise at her husbands statement was part of her wifely amiability. She tookfroma pocket a little silver watch; and as she held it before her, and stared at it with a frown of attention, the new husbands face shone.

　　"I bought it in San Antonfroma friendof mine," he told her gleefully.

　　"Its seventeen minutes past twelve," she said, looking up at him with a kind of shy and clumsy coquetry (調(diào)情；賣俏). A passenger, noting this play, grew excessively sardonic, and winked at himself in one of the numerous mirrors.

　　At last they went to the dining-car. Two rows of Negro waiters, in glowing white suits, surveyed their entrance with the interest, and also the equanimity (平靜), of men who had been forewarned. The pair fell to the lot of a waiter who happened to feel pleasure in steering them through their meal. He viewed them with the manner of a fatherly pilot, his countenance radiant with benevolence. The patronage, entwined with the ordinary deference, was not plain to them. And yet, as they returned to their coach, they showed in their faces a sense of escape.

　　26. The description of the couples clothes and behaviour at the beginning of the passage seems to indicate that they had a sense of __________.

　　A. secrecy

　　B. elation

　　C. superiority

　　D. awkwardness

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。文章第二、三段幾處的用詞如furtive、shy、embarrass、blushes等都說明這對夫婦在火車上表現(xiàn)出的笨拙和不自在。

　　27. Which of the following adjectives best depicts the interior of the coach?

　　A. Modern.

　　B. Luxurious.

　　C. Practical.

　　D. Complex.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章對火車內(nèi)部的描述使用了幾個詞組如dazzling fitting、sea-green figured velvet、shining brass、silver等都說明火車裝飾華麗。

　　28. Which of the following best describes the attitude of other people on the train towards the couple?

　　A. They regarded the couple as an object of fun.

　　B. They expressed indifference towards the couple.

　　C. They were very curious about the couple.

　　D. They showed friendliness towards the couple.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章第十段描述到那個黑人列車服務(wù)員“時不時地從遠處打量他們，嘴角帶著消遣和高人一等的笑容”，有時還以一種不易察覺的方式欺負他們，“他處處表現(xiàn)出不可一世的勢利”，這些都說明A項表述正確。

　　29. Which of the following contains a metaphor?

　　A. ... like a man waiting in a barbers shop.

　　B. ... his countenance radiant with benevolence.

　　C. ... sweeping over the horizon, a precipice.

　　D. ... as darkly brilliant as the surface of a pool of oil.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。這里是用precipice來比喻horizon，是暗喻。

　　30. We can inferfromthe last paragraph that in the dining-car ________.

　　A. the waiters were snobbish

　　B. the couple felt ill at ease

　　C. the service was satisfactory

　　D. the couple enjoyed their dinner

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章結(jié)尾一句“他們回到車廂，臉上有一種解脫的神情”，說明他們在餐車“過得并不自在”。

　　PART III GENERAL KNOWLEDGEThere are ten multiple-choice questions in this section. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　31. The northernmost part of Great Britain is _______.

　　A. Northern Ireland

　　B. Wales

　　C. England

　　D. Scotland

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。英國最北端是蘇格蘭。

　　32. It is generally agreed that _______ were the first Europeans to reach Australias shores.

　　A. the French

　　B. the Germans

　　C. the British

　　D. the Dutch

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。1606年，荷蘭航海家Willem Janszoon在約克角西岸登陸澳洲。1770年，英國人庫克船長登上澳洲大陸并宣布它為英國領(lǐng)土。

　　33. Which country is known as the Land of Maple Leaf?

　　A. Canada.

　　B. New Zealand.

　　C. Great Britain.

　　D. The United States of America.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。加拿大被譽為“楓葉之國”。

　　34. Who wrote the famous pamphlet, The Common Sense, before the American Revolution?

　　A. Thomas Jefferson.

　　B. Thomas Paine.

　　C. John Adams.

　　D. Benjamin Franklin.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B�！冻ＷR》是托馬斯潘恩在美國革命之前撰寫的。

　　35. Virginia Woolf was an important female ________ in the 20th-century England.

　　A. poet

　　B. biographer

　　C. playwright

　　D. novelist

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。弗吉尼亞伍爾芙是英國著名小說家，第二次世界大戰(zhàn)期間，她是倫敦文學界的核心人物。

　　36. ______ refers to a long narrative poem that records the adventures of a hero in a nations history.

　　A. Ballad

　　B. Romance

　　C. Epic

　　D. Elegy

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。epic是“史詩、敘事詩”的意思。

　　37. Which of the following best explores American myth in the 20th century?

　　A. The Great Gatsby.

　　B. The Sun Also Rises.

　　C. The Sound and the Fury.

　　D. Beyond the Horizon.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。《天邊外》是尤金奧尼爾的著名戲劇作品，《太陽照常升起》是海明威的代表作，《喧嘩與騷動》則是�？思{的代表作�！读瞬黄鸬纳w茨比》的作者是菲茨杰拉德的作品，反映了美國20世紀20年代到30年代的社會現(xiàn)實，對美國神話進行了另類詮釋和解讀。

　　38. _______ is defined as the study of the relationship between language and mind.

　　A. Semantics

　　B. Pragmatics

　　C. Cognitive linguistics

　　D. Sociolinguistics

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。認知語言學認為，語言的創(chuàng)建、學習及運用，基本上都必須能夠通過人類的認知而加以解釋，因為認知能力是人類知識的根本。

　　39. A vowel is differentfroma consonant in English because of ________.

　　A. absence of obstruction

　　B. presence of obstruction

　　C. manner of articulation

　　D. place of articulation

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。輔音主要是從肺部呼出的氣流在通過口腔或鼻腔時遇到阻礙而發(fā)出的音，元音的發(fā)音與之最大的區(qū)別就是不受阻礙，不產(chǎn)生摩擦。

　　40. The definition "the act of using or promoting the use of several languages, either by an individual speaker or bya community of speakers" refers to _________.

　　A. Pidgin

　　B. Creole

　　C. Multilingualism

　　D. Bilingualism

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。Multilingualism的意思是“多語現(xiàn)象、多語制”。

　　PART IV PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION

　　The passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way:

　　To correct these mistakes, you may need to change, or add a word. If you need to change a word, click the left mouse button to select the word, choose "change" on the menu and write the correct word in the blank. If you need to a word, click the left mouse button to select the word and choose "" on the menu. If you need to add a word, click the left mouse button to select the space in between the two words where you think there is a word missing, choose "add" on the menu and write the missing word in the blank. And you may use "cancel" on the menu to cancel the choice of the correction way youve just made.

　　參考答案：

　　(1) grew ∧ up — 加入up。up。grow作“成長”解時，是不及物動詞，與副詞up搭配。

　　(2) conscience — 改成consciousness。根據(jù)原文，此處表達的意思應該是“但我這樣做的同時，卻清楚地知道我在背叛自己的天性”，conscience意為“良心”，不符合句意。

　　(3) soon — 改成sooner。sooner or later是固定搭配，意為“遲早”。

　　(4) on — 刪去on后的the。on either side表示“在兩邊”，前面不應再用定冠詞the。(5) disagreeing — 改成disagreeable。此處表達的意思應為“我很快養(yǎng)成了乖戾的習性，使我在學生時代很不受歡迎”，disagreeable意為“不友善的、難相處的”。

　　(6) imaginative — 改成imaginary。imaginative意為“有想象力的”，imaginary意為“想像的、虛構(gòu)的”，此處意思應為“我養(yǎng)成了孤獨的孩子們帶有的編造故事的習慣，并與想像中的人說話”，因此改為imaginary。

　　(7) literal — 改成literary。此處的意思應為“文學抱負”，所以應將literal（文字的）改為literary（文學的'）。

　　(8) in — 刪去in。face表示“面對”，可直接跟賓語，應去掉介詞in。

　　(9) world ∧ in — 加入in。這里由which引導的定語從句修飾world，介詞in不能省略。

　　(10) Therefore — 改成Nevertheless。從上下文的含義來看，應用表達轉(zhuǎn)折的連詞nevertheless。

　　PART V TRANSLATIONSECTION

　　A CHINESE TO ENGLISH

　　Translate the underlined part of the following text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　現(xiàn)代社會無論價值觀的持有還是生活方式的選擇都充滿了矛盾。而最讓現(xiàn)代人感到尷尬的是，面對重重矛盾，許多時候你卻別無選擇。匆忙與休閑是截然不同的兩種生活方式。但在現(xiàn)實生活中，人們卻在這兩種生活方式間頻繁穿梭，有時也說不清自己到底是“休閑著”還是“匆忙著”。譬如說，當我們正在旅游勝地享受假期，卻忽然接到老板的電話，告訴我們客戶或工作方面出了麻煩——現(xiàn)代便捷先進工具在此刻顯示出了它猙獰、陰郁的面容——搞得人一下子興趣全無，接下來的休閑只是徒有其表，因為心里已是火燒火燎了。

　　參考答案：

　　Being in haste and at leisure are two distinct lifestyles. But in real life, people have to shuttle between these two lifestyles frequently, without knowing whether they are "at leisure" or "in haste". For instance, when we are enjoying our holidays in a tourist attraction, a phone callfromthe boss tells us contingencies have happened with our clients or work. The hideous and gloomy side of the convenient modern high-tech device drives away all the interest. The following leisure time can only be reduced to the pure form, because we are already in a restless and anxious state of mind.

　　SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE

　　Translate the following text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　When flying over Nepal, its easy to soar in your imagination and pretendyoure tiny — a butterfly — and drifting above one of those three-dimensional topographical maps architects use, the circling contour lines replaced by the terraced rice paddies that surround each high ridge.

　　Nepal is a small country, andfromthe windows of our plane floating eastward at 12,000 feet, one can see clearly the brilliant white mirage of the high Himalayas thirty miles off the left window.

　　Out the right window, the view is of three or four high terraced ridges giving sudden way to the plains of India beyond.

　　There were few roads visible below, most transportation in Nepal being by foot along ancient trails that connect and bind the country together. There is alsoa network of dirt airstrips, which was fortunate for me, as I had no time for the two-and-a-half week trek to my destination. I was on a flight to the local airport.

　　參考答案：

　　在尼泊爾上空飛行，你的想象力很容易開始翱翔，仿佛你很渺小——就像一只小蝴蝶——飛在一幅三維的建筑地形圖上，那些環(huán)繞著每個高脊的梯田就像圖中環(huán)形的等高線。

　　尼泊爾是一個小國。我們的飛機在一萬兩千英尺的高空向東平穩(wěn)飛行，透過左側(cè)的窗戶，可以清楚看見下方三十英里處雄偉的喜馬拉雅山呈現(xiàn)出的白色蜃景。

　　轉(zhuǎn)向右側(cè)的窗口，看到的是三、四座高高的布有梯田的山脊，很快它們就被印度境內(nèi)的廣闊平原所代替了。

　　飛機下方只能看見極少的幾條路。在尼泊爾，最主要的出行方式是沿著古老的小路步行，這些小路聯(lián)系著全國各地。除此以外，這個國家還有一個空中網(wǎng)絡(luò)，雖然機場塵土飛揚，但對我來說，也算是幸運，因為我沒時間進行兩個半星期的徒步旅行到達目的地。我當時是在去當?shù)貦C場的航班上。

　　PART VI WRITING

　　According to a recent newspaper report, manyfamous sites of historical interest in China have begun or are considering charging tourists higher entry fees during peak travel seasons. This has aroused a lot of public attention and also public debate. What is your opinion? Should famous Chinese sites of historical interest charge higher fees during peak travel seasons? Write an essay of about 400 words.

　　In the first part of your essay you should state clearly your main argument, and in the second part you should support your argument with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary.

　　You should supply an appropriate title for your essay.

　　Marks will be awarded for content, organization language and appropriateness. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your essay on ANSWER SHEET FOUR.

　　參考答案：

　　Higher Entry Fees During Peak Travel Season

　　In recent years, people in China have more time and money to visitfamous sites of historical interest, owing to longer holidays and higherincomes. These visits, on the one hand, can enrich their own life and bringthe sites substantialincomes. On the other hand, too many visits, especially during travel peaks when there are more visitors, have caused huge problems in several aspects. In my opinion, one effective solution to this problem is to charge higher fees during peak travel seasons.

　　For one reason, those who oppose higher fees have ignored the unique features offamous sites of historical interest. Differentfromthe common parks, the historical spots normally imply ample historical and cultural values. The relics in these spots are so precious and fragile that they usually need special and professional preservation and administration, which obviously costs large amounts of money. During peak travel seasons, even more tourists pay visits to the historical spots. Such huge amount of people arriving at one historical spot may probably lead to some unexpected damages. Facing this situation, there is no better measure than raising the entry fees to reduce the number of tourists in peak seasons. The only purpose of charging higher entry fees is to stop some peoples visits during special seasons so as to achieve a better protection of the valuable relics. With higher entry fees, some people may change their plans and give up their visits. Here economic means are applied to conserve precious things atthe sites of historical interest in an appropriate and sustainable way.

　　For another reason, higher fees charged may effectively reduce the number of tourists visiting historical spots in peak seasons, which is also good to the safety of the tourists. Reports on the accidents happening to tourists are not new to us. Especially during peak seasons, heavy traffic of passengers poses potential threats to the life of tourists. Furthermore, relaxation is always an ultimate goal for tourists. It is almost impossible for anyone to appreciate anything in an overcrowded spot with a sea of people around. An ideal holiday may even be ruined by the hustle and bustle andendless waiting.

　　In short, we need to control the number of visitors especially during the peak travel seasons, to guarantee a sound protection of historical spots as well as the safety of tourists. Among others, higher entry fees may be a simple and effective economic means of regulation, which should be taken into account by the authorities. As for the tourists, this may not be so bad as it sounds.

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need themto complete a gap-filling task after the mini-lecture. When the lecture is over, you will be given two minutes to check your notes, and another ten minutesto complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE. Some of the gaps may require a maximum of THREE words. Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are) both grammatically and semantically acceptable. You may refer to your noteswhile completing the task. Use the blank sheet for note-taking.

　　Now, listen to the mini-lecture.

　　Classifications of Cultures

　　According to Edward Hall, different cultures result in different ideas about the world. Hall is an anthropologist. He is interested in relations between cultures.

　　I. High-context culture

　　A. feature

　　- context: more important than the message

　　- meaning: (1)__________

　　i.e. more attention paid to (2) ___________ than to the message itself

　　B. examples

　　- personal space

　　- preference for (3)__________

　　- less respect for privacy / personal space

　　- attention to (4)___________

　　- concept of time

　　- belief in (5)____________ interpretation of time

　　- no concern for punctuality

　　- no control over time

　　II. Low-context culture

　　A. feature

　　- message: separatefromcontext

　　- meaning: (6)___________

　　B. examples

　　- personal space

　　- desire / respect for individuality / privacy

　　- less attention to body language

　　- more concern for (7)___________

　　- attitude toward time

　　- concept of time: (8)____________

　　- dislike of (9)_____________

　　- time seenas commodity

　　III. Conclusion

　　Awareness of different cultural assumptions

　　- relevance in work and life

　　e.g. business, negotiation, etc.

　　- (10)_____________ insuccessful communication

　　參考答案：

　　(1) context of message

　　(2) whats happening / the context

　　(3) closeness to people

　　(4) body language

　　(5) poly-chronic

　　(6) message itself

　　(7) the message

　　(8) mono-chronic

　　(9) lateness

　　(10) great influence / significance

　　TIPS：

　　(1) 根據(jù)原文中一句“A high-context culture is a culture in which the context of the message, or the action, or an event carries a large part of its meaning and significance.”可知答案。

　　(2) 根據(jù)原文“What this means is that in a high-context culture, more attention is paid to whats happening in and around the message than to the message itself.”可知答案。

　　(3) 根據(jù)原文“Generally speaking, in a high-context culture, because this greater dependency on group thinking, people lean towards heavier sense of involvement or closeness to people.”可得出答案。

　　(4) 根據(jù)原文“And also peoplefroma high-context culture pay attention to body language.”可得出答案。

　　(5) 根據(jù)原文“People in high-context cultures, are considered to have, what is called a poly-chronic attitude toward time.”可得出答案。

　　(6) 根據(jù)原文“A low-context culture is one in which the message, the event or the action is a separate entity, having meaning onto itself, regardless of the surroundings or the context.”可得出答案。

　　(7) 根據(jù)原文“And youll also see that people might pay less attention to body language, because as I said, the message is, the message is everything.”可得出答案。

　　(8) 原文提到在low-context culture中，人們對時間的態(tài)度可稱為mono-chronic。

　　(9) 根據(jù)原文“People in a low-context culture would be much more upset with lateness, because they feel that everyone should follow the same time.”可得出答案。

　　(10) 根據(jù)文章末尾部分“If youre in business, negotiations, interpersonal relations, if youre dealing with peoplefromdifferent cultures in any way, its going to affect every part of your life. In any multi-cultural situation, these assumptions need to be taken into account for successful interactions.”可知，在商務(wù)活動、談判、人際交往中，與來自不同文化的人打交道時，這些想法對成功的交際起著非常重要的作用。

　　script:

　　Classifications of Cultures

　　Good morning, everyone! Today, well look at culture or rather classifications of cultures. Usually, when we deal with different people, we deal with them as if we were all members of the same culture. However, its possible that peoplefromdifferent cultures have different assumptions about the world. We got in such important and basic ideas as time, personal space. And this is the view of Edward Hall. And Edward Hall is an anthropologist who spent a large part of his life studying American Indians, their culture, their language. But he was differentfroma lot of other anthropologists who just study one culture. He was interested in the relations between cultures, how cultures interact. What Hall believes is that cultures can be classified by placing them on a continuum, rangingfromwhat he called high-context to low-context.

　　OK, what is a high-context culture? A high-context culture is a culture in which the context of the message, or the action, or an event carries a large part of its meaning and significance. What this means is that in a high-context culture, more attention is paid to whats happening in and around the message than to the message itself.

　　Now, let me give you examples. First, in terms of personal space. Generally speaking, in a high-context culture, because this greater dependency on group thinking, people lean towards heavier sense of involvement or closeness to people. And they have less respect for privacy, for personal space. If you go into that culture, people might stand closer when theyre talking to you. They might touch more. And if theyre jostled in a crowd, they wont feel violated. And also peoplefroma high-context culture pay attention to body language. Because remember what I said, the definition of a high-context culture is that more attention is paid to the context of the message than to the message itself. And part of the context is body language.

　　Second, in terms of time. People in high-context cultures, are considered to have, what is called a poly-chronic attitude toward time. Here, "poly" means multiple and "chronic" means time. What this means is that they believe people, things, events have their own time. And there cant be a standard system of time for everything. What this leads them to believe is that you cant emphasize punctuality. Things happen when they are supposed to happen. So, theres a different attitude toward time; theres no set standard of time; you cant control time; everything has its own sense of time. So its a culture that pays little attention to time, to clock time.

　　Now, lets move on to low-context culture. A low-context culture is just theopposite. A low-context culture is one in which the message, the event or the action is a separate entity, having meaning onto itself, regardless of the surroundings or the context. That the message, the event, the action has meaning in itself. So what this means in a low-context culture, is that people pay more attention to the event itself rather than to the context which surrounds the event or the message. For example, in terms of personal space again, theres more emphasis on individuality. So the concept of privacy is very, very important. Whereas before, as I said, in a high-context culture, they might not even be concerned with privacy or personal space. But in a low-context culture, theres a feeling that we each have our own personal space. If you get too close, if you dont knock on doors before entering, thats an invasion of privacy. People feel violated. Theres a respect and a desire for privacy. And youll also see that people might pay less attention to body language, because as I said, the message is, the message is everything. They are not going to worry about all the details around it. What you say is the important thing, or what you do is the important thing.

　　Another example of a low-context culture is peoples attitude towards time. In terms of time, I said before, there was a poly-chronic sense of time in a high-context culture. What do you think there would be in a low-context culture? Mono-chronic? Right! A mono-chronic sense of time and by that we mean that theres one time. And that concept means that people in a low-context culture believe that theres one standard of time. And that should be for everything. And so I am not willing to hear "Oh, the traffic was heavy. Thats why Im late" or "Oh, I slept late". People in a low-context culture would be much more upset with lateness, because they feel that everyone should follow the same time. There shouldnt be all this flexibility with time and they expect punctuality. And they look at time as almosta commodity that they use expressions like "use time, to waste time, to spendtime or time is money". All of these expressions reinforce the concept that time is actually something you can hold on to.

　　So, what this is all about is that, Hall stresses that people need to be aware of these different assumptions or concepts about reality. And he thinks that this has all kinds of relevance no matter what youre doing. If youre in business, negotiations, interpersonal relations, if youre dealing with peoplefromdifferent cultures in any way, its going to affect every part of your life. In any multi-cultural situation, these assumptions need to be taken into account for successful interactions.

　　OK, today weve taken a brief look at Edward Halls view of culture, mainly his classification of high- or low-context culture with some examples. Next week, well look at some more examples of cultures on a continuum between high-context and low-context cultures.

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW/CONVERSATIONIn this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Questions 1 to 5 are based on an interview. At theendof the interview you will be given 10 seconds to answer each of the following five questions.

　　Now, listen to the interview.

　　1. According to Dr. Harley, what makes language learning more difficult after a certain age?

　　A. Differences between two languages.

　　B. Declining capacity to learn syntax.

　　C. Lack of time available.

　　D. Absence of motivation.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：答案選B。Harley博士提到有研究表明，語言特別是句法方面的學習在12歲以后更難。

　　2. What does the example of Czech speakers show?

　　A. Its natural for language learners to make errors.

　　B. Differences between languages cause difficulty.

　　C. There exist differences between English and Czech.

　　D. Difficulty stemsfromeither difference or similarity.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：答案選D。Harley博士提到有研究發(fā)現(xiàn)學習英語的捷克人會在相同的捷克語和英語句法上犯錯，因此證明了語言學習者的困難也可能來自相似性。

　　3. Which of the following methods does NOT advocate speaking?

　　A. The traditional method.

　　B. The audiolingual method.

　　C. The immersion method.

　　D. The direct method.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：答案選A。因為其他三種方法都要求或強調(diào)口語，而傳統(tǒng)方法強調(diào)語法教學。

　　4. Which hypothesis deals with the role of language knowledge in the learning process?

　　A. The acquisition and learning distinction hypothesis.

　　B. The comprehensible input hypothesis.

　　C. The monitor hypothesis.

　　D. The active filter hypothesis.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：答案選C。當Harley博士在解釋monitor hypothesis時，他提到monitor會使用語法規(guī)則，電臺主持人向他確認是否這意味著學習者運用語言知識確保所說和所寫的正確無誤，Harley博士的回答是肯定的。

　　5. Which of the following topics is NOT discussed during the interview?

　　A. Causes of language learning difficulties.

　　B. Differences between mother tongue and a second language.

　　C. Theoretical conceptualization of second language learning.

　　D. Pedagogical implementation of second language teaching.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：答案選B。其他三項在對話中均有提及，D項沒有提及。

　　script:

　　Woman: Good morning, Dr. Harley! Thank you very muchfor coming on our radio talk. We know that youre an applied linguist specializing in second language acquisition.

　　Dr. Harley: Right!

　　Woman: So, today, um, well look at this issue. Now, first, Dr. Harley, could you please tell us what is second language acquisition?

　　Dr. Harley: Well, second language acquisition is ... happens when a child or adult has alreadybecome competent at a language. And then, um, they attempt to learn another.

　　Woman: OK, most people think, including me, it is difficult to learn another language. What are the reasons? Why is it so?

　　Dr. Harley: Well, there are a number of reasons for this. Huh, first, there have been research studies. They have shown that some aspects of language learning especially syntax are more difficult beyond a certain age, say, after around 12 years of age.

　　Woman: So, age plays an important role in language learning?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes. But thats not the only reason.

　　Woman: Oh, is that so?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, for example, huh, time and interest. All children and adults often have less time and motivation to learn a second language.

　　Woman: Mm …

　　Dr. Harley: Another is related to the similarities and differences between ones mother tongue and a second language. We find the learners will experience difficulty when their mother tongue and the second language theyre learning differ. In general, the more idiosyncratic a feature is in a particular language relative to other languages, the more difficult it will be to acquire.

　　Woman: Perhaps this is the key issue. Differences between languages cause language learning problems.

　　Dr. Harley: Well, this may be one of the issues here. But this cannot be the whole story, as not all differences between languages cause difficulty. Let me give you an example.

　　Woman: OK.

　　Dr. Harley: Research has found that many errors by Czech speakers learning English were made on syntactic constructions in which the two languages do not differ.

　　Woman: Oh, really? The picture ismore complicated than weve imagined.

　　Dr. Harley: Definitely yes. Each language learning situation is different. So reasons vary a lotfromcase to case.

　　Woman: Now, Dr. Harley, since learning a second language is a difficult process, you know, in one way or another, are there any methods so far, effective methods to teach a second language?

　　Dr. Harley: There again, no method is absolutely effective in all situations. Some may prove effective, others may not. I mean all depending on specific conditions. But generally speaking, there are a number of methods that have been used to teach a second language.

　　Woman: Could you mention a few?

　　Dr. Harley: For instance, theres the traditional method. This method is based on translationfromone language to another. And it emphasizes grammar teaching. And then you have direct methods which focuses on conversational skills and all teaching must be carried out in the second language.

　　Woman: Oh, I see. Any other methods?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, for example, the audio-lingual method. This method emphasizes speaking and listening before reading and writing.

　　Woman: How interesting!

　　Dr. Harley: Then you have the immersion method. This method teaches learners exclusively through the medium of the second language.

　　Woman: How?

　　Dr. Harley: Well, it simply means that you cannot speak mother tongue. Everything must be done in the language youre learning. To me, the most natural method of learning a new language is what I call submersion. That is, to go to that country and be surrounded exclusively by speakers of that language.

　　Woman: Thank you very much Dr. Harley for introducing some of the language teaching methods. Now lets move on to something a bit theoretical. Since second language acquisition and teaching are a fascinating area for researchers, are there any theories to explain second language acquisition?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, many theories and models have been put forward by researchers so far. Today, Id like to mention the five hypotheses proposed by Steven Krashen.

　　Woman: OK.

　　Dr. Harley: The five hypotheses form what he calls the Monitor Model of second language learning.

　　Woman: What does it mean?

　　Dr. Harley: OK, the first hypothesis is the Acquisition and Learning Distinction Hypothesis. According to Krashen, children acquire their first language largely unconsciously and automatically. But adults could only learn a second language consciously and effortfully. And adults could indeed acquire the second language, at least in part.

　　Woman: Right. Then whats his second hypothesis?

　　Dr. Harley: His second hypothesis is the Natural Order in Acquisition Hypothesis. Basically, he means that the ordering which learners acquire syntactic rules is the same in both languages.

　　Woman: Oh, thats something really new to me.

　　Dr. Harley: The third hypothesis is the Monitor Hypothesis, which is central to his theory. Here again,we come across the distinction between acquisition and learning. According to this hypothesis, the acquisition processes create sentences in the second language, right? But learning enables the development of a monitoring process to check and edit this output. The monitor uses knowledge of the rules. Thats why, as I said just now, learning is a conscious process.

　　Woman: This means in learning you use knowledge of the language to make sure what you say or write is correct. Is that so?

　　Dr. Harley: Yes. His fourth hypothesis is the Comprehensible Input Hypothesis. In order to move form one stage to the next, the learner must understand the meaning and the form of the input. This emphasizes the roleof comprehension. And finally, the Active Filter Hypothesis. This suggests attitude and emotional factors are also important in second language acquisition.

　　Woman: I guess Krashens model has provided a useful framework for second language learning.

　　Dr. Harley: Yes, it indeed has. And it has also proved to be one of the most influential theoretical approaches to teaching a second language.

　　Woman: OK, Dr. Harley, thank you once again for talking to us about second language acquisition.

　　Dr. Harley: Pleasure.

　　SECTION C NEWS BROADCASTIn this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Question 6 is based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 10 seconds to answer the question.

　　Now, listen to the news.

　　6. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT?

　　A. Greyhound is Britains largest bus and train operator.

　　B. Currently Greyhound routes in Britain are limited.

　　C. The coach startsfromLondon every hour.

　　D. Passengers are offered a variety of services.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。新聞中提到First Groups是英國最大的汽車和火車運營商，而Greyhound是其下的美國品牌。

　　script:

　　The 95-year old iconic American brand — Greyhound is taking to the British roads. First Group, Britains largest bus and train operator, and owner of the Greyhound coach brand in the U.S., said the buses would start runningfromLondon Victoria to Portsmouth and Southampton on Sept. 14. Tickets will cost as little as 1 with the average journey costing 7. It plans to roll out more routes next year. The hourly bus service will take just under two hours non-stop and will offer free Wi-Fi, power sockets for each passenger, air-conditioning, complimentary newspapers and leather seats.

　　Questions 7 and 8 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions.

　　Now, listen to the news.

　　7. What does the news item say about the fires in Greece?

　　A. Fires only occurred near the Greek capital.

　　B. Fires near the capital caused casualties.

　　C. Fires near the capital were the biggest.

　　D. Fires near the capital were soon under control.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：答案選D。由“Authorities reported 75 fires across the country.”可排除A。由“No injuries were reported.”可排除B項。C項未提及。

　　8. According to the news, what measure did authorities take to fight the fires?

　　A. Residents were asked to vacate their homes.

　　B. Troops were brought in to help the firefighters.

　　C. Air operations and water drops continued overnight.

　　D. Another six fire engines joined the firefighting operation.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。新聞提到調(diào)動空軍、海軍協(xié)助滅火，故B項正確。

　　script:

　　Greek firefighters planned to continue to work through the night to contain dozens of wild fires, including a massive blaze outside Athens, authority said. Greek Prime Minister, Kostas Karamanlis, called for calm on Saturday and said ground forces will continue their superhuman efforts until dawn, when air operations and water drops will resume. Authorities reported 75 fires across the country. The fires began late Friday in Grammatiko 40 kilometers (25 miles) northeast of the capital. Wind whipped a single blaze into three fires, which joined again Saturday. No injuries were reported. Authorities mobilized unitsfromthe navy, air force and marines to assist the firefighters in Grammatiko, the State Fire Department said. "The fire isparticularly complex, given the weather, the large quantity of fuel, the terrain and the proximity of residential areas," a statementfromthe Fire Department said. The cause of the original fire which belched clouds of heavy dark smoke was unknown, and officials were investigating. Forest and bush firesare common during Greeces hot, dry summers. Six firefighting aircraft were helping firefighters, according to the Athenss news agency.

　　Questions 9 and 10 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions.

　　Now, listen to the news.

　　9. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as a cause of the current decline in the Mexican economy?

　　A. Fewer job opportunities in Mexico.

　　B. Strong ties with the U.S. economy.

　　C. Decline in tourism.

　　D. Decline in tax revenues.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。新聞提到墨西哥經(jīng)濟衰退的主要原因是其與美國經(jīng)濟聯(lián)系甚密。另外，導致墨西哥經(jīng)濟衰退的原因還包括旅游業(yè)下滑和石油、稅收的減少，只有A項不是原因。

　　10. Drop in remittancesfromabroad is mainly due to _________.

　　A. declining oil production

　　B. the outbreak of the H1N1 flu

　　C. the declining GDP in Mexico

　　D. the economic downturn in the U.S.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。新聞提到“RemittancesfromMexicans working abroad, most of them in the United States, also have fallen victim to the economic downturn.”，故D項正確。

　　script:

　　The Mexican economy went off a cliff in the second three months of2009, with the gross domestic product dropping 10.3%fromthe same period last year, according to government figures. Analysts say the main cause of Mexicos nosedive is that the nations economy is tied strongly to that of the United States, which is mired in the deepest economic downturn since the 1930s. Other factors dragging the Mexican economy down include a tourism decline caused by the H1N1 flu outbreak, declining oil and tax revenues and fewer Mexicans abroad sending money back home. Oil revenues, long Mexicos main source of money, have been hurt by lower global prices and declining production. RemittancesfromMexicans working abroad, most of them in the United States, also have fallen victim to the economic downturn. Fewer jobs in the United States means fewer opportunities for Mexicans to find work and sendmoney home. Remittances rank after oil in terms of revenue for the country. That revenue fellfrom$26 billion in2007to $25 billion in2008, Mexicos Central Bank said, and is expect to decrease even more this year. Tourism, Mexicans third largest source of revenue, has declined steadily since an outbreak of the H1N1 flue was first discovered in Mexico in April.

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION

　　In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of 20 multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　TEXT A

　　Whenever we could, Joan and I took refuge in the streets of Gibraltar. The Englishmans home is his castle because he has not much choice. There is nowhere to sit in the streets of England, not even, after twilight, in the public gardens. The climate, very often, does not even permit him to walk outside. Naturally, he stays indoors and creates a cocoonof comfort. That was the way we lived in Leeds.

　　These southern people, on the other hand, look outwards. The Gibraltarian home is, typically, a small and crowded apartment up several flights of dark and dirty stairs. In it, one, two or even three old people share a few ill-lit rooms with the young family. Once he has eaten, changed his clothes, embraced his wife, kissed his children and his parents, there is nothing to keep the southern man at home. He hurries out, taking even his breakfast coffee at his local bar. He comes home late for his afternoon meal after an appetitive hour at his café. He sleeps for an hour, dresses, goes out again and stays out until late at night. His wife does not miss him, for she is out, too — at the market in the morning and in the afternoon sitting with other mothers, baby-minding in the sun.

　　The usual Gibraltarian home has no sitting-room, living-room or lounge. The parlour of our working-class houses would be an intolerable waste of space. Easy-chairs, sofas and such-like furniture are unknown. There are no bookshelves, because there are no books. Talking and drinking, as well as eating, are done on hard chairs round the dining-table, between a sideboard decorated with the best glasses and an inevitable displaycabinetfull of family treasures, photographs and souvenirs. The elaborate chandelier over this table proclaims it as the hub of the household and of the family. "Hearth and home" makes very little sense in Gibraltar. Ones home is ones town or village, and ones hearth is the sunshine.

　　Our northern towns are dormitories with cubicles,by comparison. When we congregate — in the churches it used to be, now in the cinema, say, impersonally, or at public meetings, formally — we are scarcely ever man to man. Only in our pubs can you find the truly gregariousand communal spirit surviving, and in England even the pubs are divided along class lines.

　　Along this Mediterranean coast, home is only a refuge and a retreat. The people live together in the open air — in the street, market-place. Down here, there is a far stronger feelingof community than we had ever known. In crowded and circumscribed Gibraltar, withits complicated inter-marriages, its identity of interests, its surviving sense of siege, one can see and feel an integrated society.

　　To live in a tiny town with allthe organization of a state, with Viceroy (總督), Premier, Parliament, Press and Pentagon, all in miniature, all within arms reach, is an intensive course in civics. In such an environment, nothing can be hidden, for better or for worse. Ones successes are seen and recognized; ones failures are immediately exposed. Social consciousness is at its strongest, with the result that there is a constant and firm pressure towards good social behaviour, towards courtesy and kindness. Gibraltar, with all its faults, is the friendliest and most tolerant of places. Straightfromthe cynical anonymity of a big city, we luxuriated in its happy personalism. We look back on it, like all its exiled sons and daughters, with true affection.

　　11. Which of the following best explains the differences in ways of living between the English and the Gibraltarians?

　　A. The family structure.

　　B. Religious belief.

　　C. The climate.

　　D. Eating habit.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章對英國人和直布羅陀的居民的不同生活方式進行描寫，對比了兩種迥異的社會習俗和社會結(jié)構(gòu)。

　　12. The italicized part in the third paragraph implies that ____________.

　　A. English working-class homes are similar to Gibraltarian ones

　　B. English working-class homes have spacious sitting-rooms

　　C. English working-class homes waste a lot of space

　　D. the English working-class parlour is intolerable in Gibraltar

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。斜體字部分的含義是“英國工人階級的會客廳對直布羅陀的居民來說是一種不能容忍的對空間的浪費”。

　　13. We learnfromthe description of the Gibraltarian home that it is _________.

　　A. modern

　　B. luxurious

　　C. stark

　　D. simple

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。文章提到直布羅陀的居民家里沒有安樂椅、沙發(fā)、書柜等類似的家具，因此很簡樸。

　　14. There is a much stronger sense of _______ among the Gibraltarians.

　　A. togetherness

　　B. survival

　　C. identity

　　D. leisure

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章好幾處的用詞如congregate、gregarious、communal spirit等都體現(xiàn)了直布羅陀人彼此之間較親密。

　　15. According to the passage people in Gibraltar tendto be well-behaved because of the following EXCEPT _______.

　　A. the entirety of the state structure

　　B. constant pressurefromthe state

　　C. the small size of the town

　　D. transparency of occurrences

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。A、C、D在文章中均有提及，只有B錯誤，直布羅陀只是一個小城鎮(zhèn)，不是一個state。

　　TEXT B

　　For office innovators, the unrealized dream of the "paperless" office is a classic example of high-tech hubris (傲慢). Todays office drone is drowning in more paper than ever before.

　　But after decades of hype, American offices may finally be losing their paper obsession. The demand for paper used to outstrip the growth of the US economy, but the past two or three years have seen a marked slowdown in sales — despite a healthy economic scene.

　　Analysts attribute the decline to such factors as advances in digital databasesand communication systems. Escaping our craving for paper, however, will be anything but an easy affair.

　　"Old habits are hard to break," says Merilyn Dunn,a communications supplies director. "There are some functions that paper serves where a screen display doesnt work. Those functions are both its strength and its weakness."

　　In the early to mid-1990s, a booming economy and improved desktop printers helped boost paper sales by 6 to 7 percent each year. The convenience of desktop printing allowed office workers to indulge in printing anything and everything at very little effort or cost.

　　But now, the growth rate of paper sales in the United States is flattening by about half a percent each year. Between2004and2005, Ms. Dunn says, plain white office paper will see less than a 4 percent growth rate, despite the strong overall economy. A primary reason for the change, says Dunn, is that for the first time ever, some 47 percent of the workforce entered the job marketafter computers had already been introduced to offices.

　　"Were finally seeing a reduction in the amount of paper being used per worker in the workplace," says John Maine, vice president of a pulp and paper economic consulting firm. "More information is being transmitted electronically, and more and more peopleare comfortable with the information residing only in electronic form without printing multiple backups."

　　In addition, Mr. Maine points to the lackluster employment market for white-collar workers — the primary driver of office paper consumption for the shift in paper usage.

　　The real paradigm shift may be in the way paper is used. Since the advent of advanced and reliableoffice-network systems, data storage has moved awayfrompaper archives. The secretarial art of "filing" is disappearingfromjob descriptions. Much of todays data may never leave its original digital format.

　　The changing attitudes toward paper have finally caught the attention ofpaper companies, says Richard Harper, a researcher at Microsoft. "All of a sudden, the paper industry has started thinking, We need to learn more about the behavioural aspects of paper use," he says. "They had never asked, theyd just assumed that 70 million sheets would be bought per year as a literal function of economic growth."

　　To reduce paper use,some companies are workingto combine digital and paper capabilities. For example, Xerox Corp. is developing electronic paper: thin digital displays that respond to a stylus, like a pen on paper. Notations can be erased or saved digitally.

　　Another idea, intelligent paper, comesfromAnoto Group. It would allow notations made with a stylus on a page printed with a specialmagnetic ink to simultaneously appear ona computer screen.

　　Even with such technological advances, the improved capabilities of digital storage continue to act against "paperlessness," argues Paul Saffo, a technology forecaster. In his prophetic and metaphorical 1989 essay, "The Electronic Piata (彩罐)," he suggests that the increasing amounts of electronic data necessarily require more paper.

　　The information industry today is like a huge electronic piata, composed of a thin paper crust surrounding an electronic core," Mr. Saffo wrote. The growing paper crust "is most noticeable, but the hidden electronic core that produces the crust is far larger — and growing more rapidly. The result is that we arebecoming paperless, but we hardly notice at all."

　　In the same way that digital innovations have increased paper consumption, Saffo says, so has video conferencing — with its promise of fewer in-person meetings — boosting business travel.

　　"Thats one of the great ironies of the information age," Saffo says. "Itsjust common sense that the more you talk to someone by phoneor computer, it inevitably leads to a face-to-face meeting. The best thing for the aviation industry was the Internet."

　　16. What function does the second sentence in the first paragraph serve?

　　A. It further explains high-tech hubris.

　　B. It confirms the effect of high-tech hubris.

　　C. It offers a cause for high-tech hubris.

　　D. It offers a contrast to high-tech hubris.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章第一句話“對辦公室的創(chuàng)新者來說，‘無紙’辦公室這一尚未實現(xiàn)的夢想是一種典型的高科技傲慢表現(xiàn)”，第二句話接著說“今天的辦公室正逐漸被有史以來最多的紙淹沒”，這正是傲慢的表現(xiàn)和后果，因此是證實了high-tech hubris。

　　17. Which of the following is NOT a reason for the slowdown in paper sales?

　　A. Workforce withbetter computer skills.

　　B. Slow growth of the US economy.

　　C. Changing patterns in paper use.

　　D. Changing employment trends.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章第二段第二句提到“過去，人們對紙的需求增長超過美國經(jīng)濟的增長速度，但在近兩三年里，盡管有健康的經(jīng)濟局面，紙張銷售卻產(chǎn)生了明顯下降”，因此B項正確。

　　18. The two innovations by Xerox Corp. and Anoto Group feature ________.

　　A. integrated use of paper and digital form

　　B. a shiftfrompaper to digital form

　　C. the useof computer screen

　　D. a new style of writing

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章第十一段提到，為了減少用紙，一些公司致力于將數(shù)字和紙的性能相結(jié)合，接著以Xerox Corp.和Anoto Group為例進行了說明，因此A項正確。

　　19. What does the author mean by irony of the information age"?

　　A. The dream of the "paperless" office will be realized.

　　B. People usually prefer to have face-to-face meetings.

　　C. More digital data use leads to greater paper use.

　　D. Some people are opposed to video-conferencing.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。文章倒數(shù)第二段中論述道“數(shù)字化的革新實際上增加了紙的消耗”，因此選C。

　　20. What is the authors attitude towards "paperlessness"?

　　A. He reviews the situationfromdifferent perspectives.

　　B. He agrees with some of the people quoted in the passage.

　　C. He has a preference for digital innovations.

　　D. He thinks airlines benefit mostfromthe digital age.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章第三段第二句話，作者認為不能忽略人們對紙的渴求，并在接下來的段落里引用Merilyn Dunn的話加以證明。在文章結(jié)尾的四段中，作者也多處引用Paul Saffo的話，認為更多的靠科技手段沒有減少反而增加了人們對紙的使用。

　　TEXT C

　　When George Orwell wrote in 1941 that England was "the most class-ridden country under the sun", he was only partly right. Societies have always had their hierarchies, with some group perched at the top. In the Indian state of Bihar the Ranveer Sena, an upper-caste private army, even killed to stay there.

　　By that measure class in Britain hardly seems entrenched (根深蒂固的). But in another way Orwell was right, and continues to be. As a new YouGov poll shows, Britons are surprisingly alert to class — both their own and that of others. And they still think class is sticky. According to the poll, 48% of people aged 30 or over say they expect toendup better off than their parents. But only 28% expect toendup in a different class. More than two-thirds think neither they nor their children will leave the class they were born into.

　　What does this thing that people cannot escape consist of these days? And what do people look at when decoding which class someone belongs to? The most useful identifying markers, according to the poll, are occupation, address, accent andincome, in that order. The fact thatincome comes fourth is revealing: though some of the habits and attitudes that class used to define are more widely spread than they were, class still indicates something less blunt than mere wealth.

　　Occupation is the most trusted guide to class, but changes in the labour market have made that harder to read than when Orwell was writing. Manual workers have shrunk along with farming and heavy industry as a proportion of the workforce, while the number of people in white-collar jobs has surged. Despite this striking change, when they were asked to place themselves in a class, Brits in2006huddled in much the same categories as they did when they were asked in 1949. So, jobs, which were once a fairly reliable guide to class, havebecome misleading.

　　A survey conducted earlier this year by Expertian shows how this convergence on similar types of work has blurred class boundaries. Expertian asked people in a number of different jobs to place themselves in the working class or the middle class. Secretaries, waiters and journalists were significantly more likely to think themselves middle-class than accountants, computer programmers or civil servants. Many new white-collar jobs offer no more autonomy or better prospects than old blue-collar ones. Yet despite the muddle over what the markers of class are these days, 71% of those polled by YouGov still said they found it very or fairly easy to figure out which class others belong to.

　　In addition to changes in the labour market, two other things have smudged the borders on the class map. First, since 1945 Britain has received large numbers of immigrants who do not fit easily into existing notions of class and may have their own pyramids to scramble up. The flow of new arrivals has increased since the late 1990s, multiplying this effect.

　　Second, barriers to fame have been lowered. Britains fast-growing ranks of celebrities — like David Beckham and his wife Victoria — form a kind of parallel aristocracy open to talent, or at least to those who are uninhibited enough to meet the requests of television producers. This too has made definitionsmore complicated.

　　But many Brits, given the choice, still prefer to identify with the class they were born into rather than that which their jobs orincome would suggest. This often entails pretending to be more humble than is actually the case: 22% of white-collar workers told YouGov that they consider themselves working class. Likewise, the Expertian survey found that one in ten adults who call themselves working class are among the richest asset-owners, and that over half a million households which earn more than $191,000 a year say they are working class. Pretending to be grander thanincome and occupation suggest is rarer, though it happens too.

　　If class no longer describes a clear social, economic or even political status, is it worth paying any attention to? Possibly, yes. It is still in most cases closely correlatedwith educational attainment and career expectations.

　　21. Why does the author say "...Orwell was right, and continues to be" (Paragraph Two)?

　　A. Because there was stronger class consciousness in India.

　　B. Because more people hope toendup in a higher class.

　　C. Because people expect to gain more wealth than their parents.

　　D. Because Britons are still conscious of their class status.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。George Orwell說英國是“世界上階級劃分最明顯的國家”，而后文也提到英國人對階級很敏感，因此D項正確。

　　22. ...class still indicates something less blunt than mere wealth" (Paragraph Three) means that ________.

　　A. class is still defined by its own habits and attitudes

　　B. class would refer to something more subtle than money

　　C. peoplefromdifferent classes may have the same habits or attitudes

　　D.income is unimportant in determining which class one belongs to

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。該句話的含義是“階級不僅僅意味著財富的多少，它還體現(xiàn)著一些不那么直接的東西”，因此B項表述正確。

　　23. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT?

　　A. White-collar workers would place themselves in a different class.

　　B. People with different jobs may place themselves in the same class.

　　C. Occupation and class are no longer related with each other.

　　D. Changes in the workforce have made it difficult to define class.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。文章第三段提到，在判定某人所屬的階級時，英國人常常用到幾個標準，其中第一個便是職業(yè)，可見職業(yè)和階級是緊密聯(lián)系的。

　　24. Which of the following is NOT a cause to blur class distinction?

　　A. Notions of class by immigrants.

　　B. Changing trends of employment.

　　C. Easy access to fame.

　　D. Fewer types of work.

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。其他三項在第六、七、四段中均有提及。

　　25. When some successful white-collar workers choose to stay in the working class, it implies that they are _________.

　　A. showing modesty

　　B. showing self-respect

　　C. expressing boastfulness

　　D. making an understatement

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章倒數(shù)第二段中提到，很多英國人傾向于將自己歸屬于出生時的階級，而不是與自己的職業(yè)和收入相匹配的階級，他們常常表現(xiàn)出更謙遜的一面，因此A項正確。

　　TEXT D

　　The train was whirling onward with such dignity of motion that a glancefromthe window seemed simply to prove that plains of Texas were pouring eastward. Vast flats of green grass, dull-hued spaces of mesquite and cactus, little groups of frame houses, woods of light and tender trees, all were sweeping into the east, sweeping over the horizon, a precipice.

　　A newly married pair had boarded this coach at San Antonio. The mans face was reddenedfrommany days in the wind and sun, and a direct result of his new black clothes was that his brick-coloured hands were constantly performing in a most conscious fashion. From time to time he looked down respectfully at his attire. He sat with a hand on each knee, like a man waiting in a barbers shop. The glances he devoted to other passengers were furtive and shy.

　　The bride was not pretty, nor was she very young. She wore a dress of blue cashmere, with small reservations of velvet here and there, and with steel buttons abounding. She continually twisted her head to regard her puff sleeves, very stiff, and high. They embarrassed her. It was quite apparent that she had cooked, and that she expected to cook, dutifully. The blushes caused by the careless scrutiny of some passengers as she had entered the car were strange to see upon this plain, under-class countenance, which was drawn in placid, almost emotionless lines.

　　They were evidently very happy. "Ever been in a parlor-car before?" he asked, smiling with delight.

　　"No," she answered; "I never was. Its fine, aint it?"

　　"Great! And then after a while well go forward to the dinner, and get a big lay-out. Fresh meal in the world. Charge a dollar."

　　"Oh, do they?" cried the bride. "Charge a dollar? Why, thats too much — for us — aint it, Jack?"

　　"Nor this trip, anyhow," he answered bravely. "Were going to go the whole thing."

　　Later he explained to her about the trains. "You see, its a thousand milesfromoneendof Texas to the other; and this runs right across it, and never stops but four times.” He had the pride of an owner. He pointed out to her the dazzling fittings of the coach; and in truth her eyes opened wider and she contemplated the sea-green figured velvet, the shining brass, silver, and glass, the wood that gleamed as darkly brilliant as the surface of a pool of oil. At oneenda bronze figure sturdily held a support for a separated chamber, and at convenient places on the ceiling were frescos in olive and silver.

　　To the minds of the pair, their surroundings reflected the glory of their marriage that morning in San Antonio; this was the environment of their new estate; and the mans face in particular beamed with an elation that made him appear ridiculous to the Negro porter. This individual at times surveyed themfromafar with an amused and superior grin. On other occasions he bullied them with skill in ways that did not make it exactly plain to them that they were being bullied. He subtly used all the manners of the most unconquerable kind of snobbery. He oppressed them. But of this oppression they had small knowledge, and they speedily forgot that infrequently a number of travelers covered them with stares of derisive enjoyment. Historically there was supposed to be something infinitely humorous in their situation.

　　"We are due in Yellow Sky at 3:42," he said, looking tenderly into her eyes.

　　"Oh, are we?" she said, as if she had not been aware of it. To evince (表現(xiàn)出) surprise at her husbands statement was part of her wifely amiability. She tookfroma pocket a little silver watch; and as she held it before her, and stared at it with a frown of attention, the new husbands face shone.

　　"I bought it in San Antonfroma friendof mine," he told her gleefully.

　　"Its seventeen minutes past twelve," she said, looking up at him with a kind of shy and clumsy coquetry (調(diào)情；賣俏). A passenger, noting this play, grew excessively sardonic, and winked at himself in one of the numerous mirrors.

　　At last they went to the dining-car. Two rows of Negro waiters, in glowing white suits, surveyed their entrance with the interest, and also the equanimity (平靜), of men who had been forewarned. The pair fell to the lot of a waiter who happened to feel pleasure in steering them through their meal. He viewed them with the manner of a fatherly pilot, his countenance radiant with benevolence. The patronage, entwined with the ordinary deference, was not plain to them. And yet, as they returned to their coach, they showed in their faces a sense of escape.

　　26. The description of the couples clothes and behaviour at the beginning of the passage seems to indicate that they had a sense of __________.

　　A. secrecy

　　B. elation

　　C. superiority

　　D. awkwardness

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。文章第二、三段幾處的用詞如furtive、shy、embarrass、blushes等都說明這對夫婦在火車上表現(xiàn)出的笨拙和不自在。

　　27. Which of the following adjectives best depicts the interior of the coach?

　　A. Modern.

　　B. Luxurious.

　　C. Practical.

　　D. Complex.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章對火車內(nèi)部的描述使用了幾個詞組如dazzling fitting、sea-green figured velvet、shining brass、silver等都說明火車裝飾華麗。

　　28. Which of the following best describes the attitude of other people on the train towards the couple?

　　A. They regarded the couple as an object of fun.

　　B. They expressed indifference towards the couple.

　　C. They were very curious about the couple.

　　D. They showed friendliness towards the couple.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。文章第十段描述到那個黑人列車服務(wù)員“時不時地從遠處打量他們，嘴角帶著消遣和高人一等的笑容”，有時還以一種不易察覺的方式欺負他們，“他處處表現(xiàn)出不可一世的勢利”，這些都說明A項表述正確。

　　29. Which of the following contains a metaphor?

　　A. ... like a man waiting in a barbers shop.

　　B. ... his countenance radiant with benevolence.

　　C. ... sweeping over the horizon, a precipice.

　　D. ... as darkly brilliant as the surface of a pool of oil.

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。這里是用precipice來比喻horizon，是暗喻。

　　30. We can inferfromthe last paragraph that in the dining-car ________.

　　A. the waiters were snobbish

　　B. the couple felt ill at ease

　　C. the service was satisfactory

　　D. the couple enjoyed their dinner

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。文章結(jié)尾一句“他們回到車廂，臉上有一種解脫的神情”，說明他們在餐車“過得并不自在”。

　　PART III GENERAL KNOWLEDGEThere are ten multiple-choice questions in this section. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　31. The northernmost part of Great Britain is _______.

　　A. Northern Ireland

　　B. Wales

　　C. England

　　D. Scotland

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。英國最北端是蘇格蘭。

　　32. It is generally agreed that _______ were the first Europeans to reach Australias shores.

　　A. the French

　　B. the Germans

　　C. the British

　　D. the Dutch

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。1606年，荷蘭航海家Willem Janszoon在約克角西岸登陸澳洲。1770年，英國人庫克船長登上澳洲大陸并宣布它為英國領(lǐng)土。

　　33. Which country is known as the Land of Maple Leaf?

　　A. Canada.

　　B. New Zealand.

　　C. Great Britain.

　　D. The United States of America.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。加拿大被譽為“楓葉之國”。

　　34. Who wrote the famous pamphlet, The Common Sense, before the American Revolution?

　　A. Thomas Jefferson.

　　B. Thomas Paine.

　　C. John Adams.

　　D. Benjamin Franklin.

　　參考答案： B

　　TIP：選B。《常識》是托馬斯潘恩在美國革命之前撰寫的。

　　35. Virginia Woolf was an important female ________ in the 20th-century England.

　　A. poet

　　B. biographer

　　C. playwright

　　D. novelist

　　參考答案： D

　　TIP：選D。弗吉尼亞伍爾芙是英國著名小說家，第二次世界大戰(zhàn)期間，她是倫敦文學界的核心人物。

　　36. ______ refers to a long narrative poem that records the adventures of a hero in a nations history.

　　A. Ballad

　　B. Romance

　　C. Epic

　　D. Elegy

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。epic是“史詩、敘事詩”的意思。

　　37. Which of the following best explores American myth in the 20th century?

　　A. The Great Gatsby.

　　B. The Sun Also Rises.

　　C. The Sound and the Fury.

　　D. Beyond the Horizon.

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。《天邊外》是尤金奧尼爾的著名戲劇作品，《太陽照常升起》是海明威的代表作，《喧嘩與騷動》則是�？思{的代表作�！读瞬黄鸬纳w茨比》的作者是菲茨杰拉德的作品，反映了美國20世紀20年代到30年代的社會現(xiàn)實，對美國神話進行了另類詮釋和解讀。

　　38. _______ is defined as the study of the relationship between language and mind.

　　A. Semantics

　　B. Pragmatics

　　C. Cognitive linguistics

　　D. Sociolinguistics

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。認知語言學認為，語言的創(chuàng)建、學習及運用，基本上都必須能夠通過人類的認知而加以解釋，因為認知能力是人類知識的根本。

　　39. A vowel is differentfroma consonant in English because of ________.

　　A. absence of obstruction

　　B. presence of obstruction

　　C. manner of articulation

　　D. place of articulation

　　參考答案： A

　　TIP：選A。輔音主要是從肺部呼出的氣流在通過口腔或鼻腔時遇到阻礙而發(fā)出的音，元音的發(fā)音與之最大的區(qū)別就是不受阻礙，不產(chǎn)生摩擦。

　　40. The definition "the act of using or promoting the use of several languages, either by an individual speaker or bya community of speakers" refers to _________.

　　A. Pidgin

　　B. Creole

　　C. Multilingualism

　　D. Bilingualism

　　參考答案： C

　　TIP：選C。Multilingualism的意思是“多語現(xiàn)象、多語制”。

　　PART IV PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION

　　The passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way:

　　To correct these mistakes, you may need to change, or add a word. If you need to change a word, click the left mouse button to select the word, choose "change" on the menu and write the correct word in the blank. If you need to a word, click the left mouse button to select the word and choose "" on the menu. If you need to add a word, click the left mouse button to select the space in between the two words where you think there is a word missing, choose "add" on the menu and write the missing word in the blank. And you may use "cancel" on the menu to cancel the choice of the correction way youve just made.

　　參考答案：

　　(1) grew ∧ up — 加入up。up。grow作“成長”解時，是不及物動詞，與副詞up搭配。

　　(2) conscience — 改成consciousness。根據(jù)原文，此處表達的意思應該是“但我這樣做的同時，卻清楚地知道我在背叛自己的天性”，conscience意為“良心”，不符合句意。

　　(3) soon — 改成sooner。sooner or later是固定搭配，意為“遲早”。

　　(4) on — 刪去on后的the。on either side表示“在兩邊”，前面不應再用定冠詞the。(5) disagreeing — 改成disagreeable。此處表達的意思應為“我很快養(yǎng)成了乖戾的習性，使我在學生時代很不受歡迎”，disagreeable意為“不友善的、難相處的”。

　　(6) imaginative — 改成imaginary。imaginative意為“有想象力的”，imaginary意為“想像的、虛構(gòu)的”，此處意思應為“我養(yǎng)成了孤獨的孩子們帶有的編造故事的習慣，并與想像中的人說話”，因此改為imaginary。

　　(7) literal — 改成literary。此處的意思應為“文學抱負”，所以應將literal（文字的）改為literary（文學的）。

　　(8) in — 刪去in。face表示“面對”，可直接跟賓語，應去掉介詞in。

　　(9) world ∧ in — 加入in。這里由which引導的定語從句修飾world，介詞in不能省略。

　　(10) Therefore — 改成Nevertheless。從上下文的含義來看，應用表達轉(zhuǎn)折的連詞nevertheless。

　　PART V TRANSLATIONSECTION

　　A CHINESE TO ENGLISH

　　Translate the underlined part of the following text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　現(xiàn)代社會無論價值觀的持有還是生活方式的選擇都充滿了矛盾。而最讓現(xiàn)代人感到尷尬的是，面對重重矛盾，許多時候你卻別無選擇。匆忙與休閑是截然不同的兩種生活方式。但在現(xiàn)實生活中，人們卻在這兩種生活方式間頻繁穿梭，有時也說不清自己到底是“休閑著”還是“匆忙著”。譬如說，當我們正在旅游勝地享受假期，卻忽然接到老板的電話，告訴我們客戶或工作方面出了麻煩——現(xiàn)代便捷先進工具在此刻顯示出了它猙獰、陰郁的面容——搞得人一下子興趣全無，接下來的休閑只是徒有其表，因為心里已是火燒火燎了。

　　參考答案：

　　Being in haste and at leisure are two distinct lifestyles. But in real life, people have to shuttle between these two lifestyles frequently, without knowing whether they are "at leisure" or "in haste". For instance, when we are enjoying our holidays in a tourist attraction, a phone callfromthe boss tells us contingencies have happened with our clients or work. The hideous and gloomy side of the convenient modern high-tech device drives away all the interest. The following leisure time can only be reduced to the pure form, because we are already in a restless and anxious state of mind.

　　SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE

　　Translate the following text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　When flying over Nepal, its easy to soar in your imagination and pretendyoure tiny — a butterfly — and drifting above one of those three-dimensional topographical maps architects use, the circling contour lines replaced by the terraced rice paddies that surround each high ridge.

　　Nepal is a small country, andfromthe windows of our plane floating eastward at 12,000 feet, one can see clearly the brilliant white mirage of the high Himalayas thirty miles off the left window.

　　Out the right window, the view is of three or four high terraced ridges giving sudden way to the plains of India beyond.

　　There were few roads visible below, most transportation in Nepal being by foot along ancient trails that connect and bind the country together. There is alsoa network of dirt airstrips, which was fortunate for me, as I had no time for the two-and-a-half week trek to my destination. I was on a flight to the local airport.

　　參考答案：

　　在尼泊爾上空飛行，你的想象力很容易開始翱翔，仿佛你很渺小——就像一只小蝴蝶——飛在一幅三維的建筑地形圖上，那些環(huán)繞著每個高脊的梯田就像圖中環(huán)形的等高線。

　　尼泊爾是一個小國。我們的飛機在一萬兩千英尺的高空向東平穩(wěn)飛行，透過左側(cè)的窗戶，可以清楚看見下方三十英里處雄偉的喜馬拉雅山呈現(xiàn)出的白色蜃景。

　　轉(zhuǎn)向右側(cè)的窗口，看到的是三、四座高高的布有梯田的山脊，很快它們就被印度境內(nèi)的廣闊平原所代替了。

　　飛機下方只能看見極少的幾條路。在尼泊爾，最主要的出行方式是沿著古老的小路步行，這些小路聯(lián)系著全國各地。除此以外，這個國家還有一個空中網(wǎng)絡(luò)，雖然機場塵土飛揚，但對我來說，也算是幸運，因為我沒時間進行兩個半星期的徒步旅行到達目的地。我當時是在去當?shù)貦C場的航班上。

　　PART VI WRITING

　　According to a recent newspaper report, manyfamous sites of historical interest in China have begun or are considering charging tourists higher entry fees during peak travel seasons. This has aroused a lot of public attention and also public debate. What is your opinion? Should famous Chinese sites of historical interest charge higher fees during peak travel seasons? Write an essay of about 400 words.

　　In the first part of your essay you should state clearly your main argument, and in the second part you should support your argument with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary.

　　You should supply an appropriate title for your essay.

　　Marks will be awarded for content, organization language and appropriateness. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your essay on ANSWER SHEET FOUR.

　　參考答案：

　　Higher Entry Fees During Peak Travel Season

　　In recent years, people in China have more time and money to visitfamous sites of historical interest, owing to longer holidays and higherincomes. These visits, on the one hand, can enrich their own life and bringthe sites substantialincomes. On the other hand, too many visits, especially during travel peaks when there are more visitors, have caused huge problems in several aspects. In my opinion, one effective solution to this problem is to charge higher fees during peak travel seasons.

　　For one reason, those who oppose higher fees have ignored the unique features offamous sites of historical interest. Differentfromthe common parks, the historical spots normally imply ample historical and cultural values. The relics in these spots are so precious and fragile that they usually need special and professional preservation and administration, which obviously costs large amounts of money. During peak travel seasons, even more tourists pay visits to the historical spots. Such huge amount of people arriving at one historical spot may probably lead to some unexpected damages. Facing this situation, there is no better measure than raising the entry fees to reduce the number of tourists in peak seasons. The only purpose of charging higher entry fees is to stop some peoples visits during special seasons so as to achieve a better protection of the valuable relics. With higher entry fees, some people may change their plans and give up their visits. Here economic means are applied to conserve precious things atthe sites of historical interest in an appropriate and sustainable way.

　　For another reason, higher fees charged may effectively reduce the number of tourists visiting historical spots in peak seasons, which is also good to the safety of the tourists. Reports on the accidents happening to tourists are not new to us. Especially during peak seasons, heavy traffic of passengers poses potential threats to the life of tourists. Furthermore, relaxation is always an ultimate goal for tourists. It is almost impossible for anyone to appreciate anything in an overcrowded spot with a sea of people around. An ideal holiday may even be ruined by the hustle and bustle andendless waiting.

　　In short, we need to control the number of visitors especially during the peak travel seasons, to guarantee a sound protection of historical spots as well as the safety of tourists. Among others, higher entry fees may be a simple and effective economic means of regulation, which should be taken into account by the authorities. As for the tourists, this may not be so bad as it sounds.

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷2

　　PART ILISTENING COMPREHENSION (35 MIN)

　　SECTIONAMINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you willhear a mini-lecture .You willhear the lecture ONCE ONL Y. While

　　listening, take notes on the important points .Your notes will not be marked, but you will need themto complete a gap-filling task after the mini-lecture ．When the lecture is over, you will be given two minutes to check your notes, and another ten minutesto complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE, using no more than three words in each gap ．Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are)both grammatically and semantically acceptable ． You may refer to your noteswhile completing the task ． Use the blank sheet for note-taking ．Now, listen to the mini-lecture ．

　　There are difference between active learning and passive learning.

　　Characteristics of active learners:

　　I. reading with purposes

　　A. before reading: setting goals

　　B. while reading: (1) ________

　　AI.(2) ______ and critical in thinking i.e. information processing, e.g.

　　-- connections between the known and the new information -- identification of (3) ______ concepts

　　-- judgment on the value of (4) _____.

　　III. active in listening

　　A.ways of note-taking: (5) _______.

　　B.before note-taking: listening and thinking IV. being able to get assistance

　　A.reason 1:knowing comprehension problems because of (6) ______.

　　B.Reason 2: being able to predict study difficulties

　　--active learners: accept

　　--passive learners: (8) _______

　　B. attitude toward (9) ______

　　--active learners: evaluate and change behaviour

　　--passive learners: no change in approach

　　Relationship between skill and will: will is more important in (10) ______.

　　Lack of will leads to difficulty in college learning.

　　SECTION B NTERVIEW

　　In this section

　　you willhear everything

　　ONCE

　　ONLY . Listen

　　carefully

　　and then answer the

　　questions that follow ．Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO ． Questions 1 to 5 are based on an interview ． At theendof the interview you will be given 10 seconds to answer each of the following five questions ． Now listen to the interview ．

　　1． According to the interviewer, which of the following best indicates the relationship between choice and mobility?

　　A ． Better education→ greater mobility → more choices．

　　B ． Better education→ more choices → greater mobility ．

　　C． Greater mobility→better education → more choices．

　　D ．Greater mobility→ more choices →better education．

　　2．According to the interview ，which of the following details about the first poll is INCORRECT?

　　A ． Shorter work hours was least chosen for being most important ．

　　B ． Chances for advancement might have been favoured by young people ．

　　C． Highincome failedto come on top for being most important．

　　D ．Job security came second according to the poll results ．

　　3． According to the interviewee ， which is the main difference between the first and the second poll?

　　A ． The type of respondents who were invited ．

　　B ． The way in which the questions were designed ．

　　C． The content area of the questions．

　　D ． The number of poll questions ．

　　4． What can we learnfromthe respondents ’ answers to items 2， 4 and 7 in the second poll?

　　A ． Recognitionfromcolleagues should be given less importance ．

　　B ． Workers are always willing and ready to learn more new skills．

　　C．Psychological reward is more important than material one ．

　　D ． Work will have to be made interesting to raise efficiency．

　　5． Accordingto the interviewee ， which of the followingcan offer both psychologicaland

　　monetary benefits?

　　A ． Contact with many people ．B ． Chances for advancement．

　　C． Appreciationfromcoworkers ．D ． Chances to learn new skills

　　SECTION CNEWS BROADCAST

　　In this section you willhear everything ONCE ONLY ． Listen carefullyand then answer the

　　questions that follow ．Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO ． Questions 6 and 7 are based on the following news, At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions． Now listen to the news ．

　　6． According to the news item ，“ sleep boxes” are designed to solve the problems of

　　A ． airports ．B． passengers．C． architects．D ．companies．

　　7． Which of the following is NOT true with reference to the news?

　　A ． Sleep boxes can be rented for different lengths of time ．

　　B ． Renters of normal height can stand up inside ．

　　C． Bedding can be automatically changed ．

　　D ． Renters can take a shower inside the box．

　　Question 8 is based on the following news． At theendof the news item， you will be given 10

　　seconds to answer the question．Now listen to the news ．

　　8． What is the news item mainly about?

　　A ． London ’S preparations for the Notting Hill Carnival．

　　B ． Main features of the Notting Hill Carnival．

　　C．Polices preventive measures for the carnival ．

　　D ．Police participation in the carnival ．

　　Questions 9 and 10 are based on the following news ． At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions．Now listen to the news ．

　　9． The news item reports on a research finding about

　　A ． the Dutch famine and the Dutch women ．

　　B ． early malnutrition and heart health ．

　　C． the causes of death during the famine．

　　D ． nutrition in childhood and adolescence ．

　　10． When did the research team carry out the study?

　　A ．At theendof World War II ．

　　B ． Between 1944 and 1945．

　　C． In the 1950s．

　　D ． In2007．

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION (30 MIN)

　　In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of 20 multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO ． TEXT A

　　Three hundred years ago news travelled by word of mouth or 1etter, and circulated in taverns and coffee houses in the form of pamphlets and newsletters．“ The coffee houses particularly are． very roomy for a free conversation ， and for reading at an easier rate all manner of printed news，”noted one observer．Everything changed in 1833 when the first mass-audience newspaper,

　　The New York Sun，pioneered the use of advertising to reduce the cost of news， thus giving

　　advertisers access to a wider audience．The penny press，followed by radio and television ，turned newsfroma two-way conversation into a one — way broadcast， with a relatively small number of

　　firms controlling the media ．

　　Now, the news industry is returning to something closer to the coffee house．Theinternetis

　　making news more participatory ，social and diverse，reviving the discursive characteristics of" the

　　era before the mass media．That will have profound effects on society and politics．In much of the

　　world ．the mass media are flourishing ．Newspaper circulation rose globally by 6% between2005and2009． But those global figures mask a sharp decline in readership in rich countries．

　　Over the past decade，throughout the Western world ，people have been giving up newspapers and TV news and keeping up with events in profoundly different ways ． Most strikingly, ordinary people are increasingly involvedin compiling ， sharing，filtering ， discussing and distributing news． Twitterlets people anywhere report whatthey are seeing． Classifieddocuments are

　　published intheirthousands online．Mobile · phone footage of Arab uprisings andAmerican tornadoesisposted onsocial-networkingsitesandshownontelevision newscasts．Social-networking sites help people find， discuss and share news with their friends ．

　　And it is not just readers who are challenging the media elite． Technology firms including Google ， Facebook and Twitter havebecome important conduits of news． Celebrities and world leaders publish updates directly viasocial networks ；many countries now make raw data available through “ open government” initiatives ． Theinternetlets people read newspapers or watch television channelsfromaround the world． The web has allowed new providers of news ，fromindividual bloggersto sites ， to rise to prominence in a very short space of time． And it has made possible entirely new approaches to journalism ， such as that practiced by WikiLeaks ，which

　　provides an anonymous way forwhistleblowers to publishdocuments． The news agenda is no longer controlled by a few press barons and state outlets ．

　　In principle ， every liberalshouldcelebrate this． Amore participatory and social news environment ， with a remarkablediversity and range of news sources， is a good thing ．The transformation of the news business is unstoppable， and attempts to reverse it are doomed to failure ．As producers of new journalism ，individuals can be scrupulous with facts and transparent with their sources． As consumers， they can be general in their tastes and demanding in their standards．And although this transformation does raise concerns ，there is much to celebrate in the noisy, diverse， vociferous ， argumentative and stridently alive environment of the news business in the ages of theinternet． The coffee house is back． Enjoy it ．

　　11． Accordingto the passage， what initiatedthe transformationofcoffee-house news to

　　mass-media news?

　　A ． The emergence of big mass media firms ．

　　B ． The popularity of radio and television ．

　　C． The appearance of advertising in newspapers ．

　　D ． The increasing number of newspaper readers．

　　12． Which of the followingstatements best supports“ Now, the Hews industry is returning to

　　something closer to the coffee house”?

　　ANewspaper circulation rose globally by 6 ％ between2005and2009．

　　B ．People in the Western world are giving up newspapers and TV news ．

　　C． Classified documents are published in theirthousands online．

　　D ． More people are involved in finding， discussing and distributing news ．

　　13． According to the passage， which is NOT a role played by information technology?

　　A ． Challenging the traditional media ．

　　B ．Planning the return to coffee-house news ．

　　C．Providing people with access to classified files ．

　　D ．Giving ordinary people the chance to provide news ．

　　14． The author’ S tone in the last paragraph towards new journalism is

　　A ． optimistic and cautious ．B． supportive and skeptical ．

　　C． doubtful and reserved ．D． ambiguous and cautious．

　　15． In“ The coffee house is back”， coffee house best symbolizes A ． the changing characteristics of news audience ．

　　B ． the more diversified means of news distribution ．

　　C． the participatory nature of news ．

　　D. the more varied sources of news ．

　　TEXT B

　　Paris is like pornography ．You respond even if you don ’t want to ．You turn a corner and see a vista，and your imagination bolts away 。Suddenly you are thinking about what it would be like to live in Paris ，and then you think about all the lives you have not lived ．Sometimes，though, when you are lucky, you only think about how many pleasures the day ahead holds． Then, you feel privileged ．

　　The lobby of the hotel is decorated in red and gold． It gives off a whiff of 1 9m．century

　　decadence． Probably as much as any hotel in Paris ， this hotel is sexy ． 1 was standing facing the

　　revolving doors and the driveway beyond． A car with a woman in the back seat— a woman in a

　　short skirt and black — leather jacket— pulled up before the hotel door ．She swung off and she was

　　wearinghigh heels． Normally,my mind wouldhave leaped and imagined a story for this

　　woman ． Now it didnt I stood there and told myself．Cheer up． You’ re in Paris．

　　In many ways ，Paris is bestvisited in winter ．The tourist crowds are at a minimum ，and one

　　is not being jammed off the narrow sidewalks along the Rue Dauphine． More than this ． Paris is

　　like many other European cities in that the season of blockbuster cultural events tends to begin in mid-to late fall and so ， by the time of winter, most of the cultural treasures of the city are laid out to be admired．

　　The other great reason why Paris in winter is so much better than Paris in spring and fall is that after theendof the August holidays and the return of chic Parisian women to their city, the restaurant-opening season truly begins hopping ．By winter ， many of the new restaurants have worked out their kinks( 不足；困難 )and，once the hype has died down，it is possible to see which restaurants are actually good and which are merely noisy and crowded ．

　　Most people are about as happy as they set their mind to being， Lincoln said ． In Paris it

　　doesn’t take much to be happy ．Outside the hotel ，the sky was pale and felt very high up ．I walked

　　the few blocks to the Seine and began running along the blue-green river toward the Eiffel

　　Tower．The tower in the distance was black ，and felt strange and beautiful the way that many things built for the joy of building do ．As I ran toward it ，because of its lattice structure, the tower seemed obviously delicate ． Seeing it， I felt a sense of protectiveness．

　　I think it was this moment of protectiveness that marked the change in my mood and my slowlybecoming thrilled with being in Paris ．

　　During winter evenings ，Paris’s streetlamps have a halo and resemble dandelions．In winter,

　　when one leaves the Paris street and enters a caf6 or restaurant， the light and temperature change

　　suddenly and dramatically, there is the sense of having discovered something secret． In winter,

　　because the days are short， there is an urgency to the choices one makes ． There is the sense that

　　life is short and so let us decide on what matters ．

　　16. Accordingto the passage， once in Paris one might experience all the followingfeelings

　　EXCEPT

　　A ． regret．B． condescension．C． expectation．D ． impulse．

　　17． Winter is the best season to visit Paris． Which of the following does NOT support thisstatement?

　　A ． Fashionable Parisian women return to Paris ．

　　B ． More entertainment activities are staged ．

　　C． There are more good restaurants to choosefrom．

　　D ． There are fewer tourists in Paris ．

　　18． "Most people are about as happy as they set their mind to being ．” This statement means that most people

　　A ． expect to be happy．

　　B ． hope to be as happy as others．

　　C． would be happier if they wanted ．

　　D ． can be happy if they want ．

　　19． In the eyes of the author, winter in Paris is significant because of

　　A ． the atmosphere of its evenings．

　　B ． its implications for life．

　　C． the contrast it brings ．

　　D ． the discovery one makes．

　　20． At theendof the passage, the author found himself in a mood of

　　A ． excitement．B ．thoughtfulness．

　　C． loneliness．D． joyfulness ．

　　TEXT C

　　If you want to know why Denmark is the worlds leader in wind power, start with a

　　three-hour car tripfromthe capital Copenhagen --mind the bicyclists --to the small town of Lem

　　on the far west coast of Jutland ．Youll feel it as you cross the 6.8 km-long Great Belt Bridge：

　　Denmarks bountiful wind ， so fierce even on a calm summers day that it threatens to shove your car into the waves below ．But wind itself is only part of the reason ．In Lem ，workers in factories the size of aircraft hangars build the wind turbines sold by Vestas ， the Danish company that has emerged as the industrys top manufacturer around the globe ． The work is both gross and fine ；employees weld together massive curved sheets of steel to make central shafts as tall as a 14-story building ， and assemble engine housings( 機器外罩 )that hold some 18,000 separate parts ． Most impressive are the turbines blades, which scoop the wind with each sweeping revolution ．As smooth as an Olympic swimsuit and honed to aerodynamic perfection， each blade weighs in at 7,000 kg，and they’re what help make Vestas’turbines the best in the world ．“The blade is where the secret is，” says Erik Therkelsen ， a Vestas executive．“ If we can make a turbine ， its sold．”

　　But technology,like the wind itselK is just one more part of the reason for Denmarks dominance．In theend， it happened because Denmark had the political and public will to decide that it wanted to be a leader and to follow through ． Beginning in 1 979 ， the government began a determined programme of subsidies and loan guarantees to build up its wind industry ． Copenhagen covered 30% of investment costs ， and guaranteed loans for large turbine exporters such as Vestas．It also mandated that utilities purchase wind energy at a preferential price— thus guaranteeing investors a customer base ． Energy taxes were channeled into research centres， where engineers crafted designs that would eventually produce cutting-edge giants like Vestas?3-magawatt(MW)V90 turbine ．

　　As a result． wind turbines now dot Denmark ．The country gets more than 1 9％ of its electricityfromthe breeze(Spain and Portugal ， the next highest countries ，get about 1 0 ％ )and Danish companies control one — third of the global wind market ， earning billions in exports and creating a national championfromscratch ．“ They were out early in driving renewables ，and that gave them the chance to be a technology leader and a job — creation leader,” says Jake Schmidt， international climatepolicy director for the New York City — based Natural Resources Defense

　　Council ．“ They have always been one or two steps ahead of others."

　　The challenge now for Denmark is to help the rest of the world catch up． Beyond wind ， the

　　country(pop.5.5 million)is a world leader in energy efficiency， getting more GDP per watt than any other member ofthe E． U ．Carbon emissions are down 13.3％from1990 levels and total energy consumptionhas barely moved，even as Denmarkseconomy continued to grow at a healthy clip ．With Copenhagen set to host all-important U ．N ．climate change talks in December --where the world hopes for a successor to the expiring Kyoto Protocol -- and the global recession

　　beginning to hit environmental plans in capitals everywhere，Denmarks example couldnt be more timely ．“ Welltryto make Denmarka showroom. ” says Prime Minister Anders Fogh Rasmussen．“ You can reduce energy use and carbon emissions， and achieve economic growth." Its tempting to assume that Denmark is innately green ， with the kind of Scandinavian good conscience that has made it such a pleasant global citizen since，oh，the whole Viking thing ．But the country ’s policies were actually bornfroma different emotion ，one nowin common currency ：fear．When the 1973 oil crisis hit ，90％ of Denmarks energy camefrompetroleum ，almost all of it imported ．Buffeted by the same supply shocks that hit the rest of the developed world ，Denmark launched a rapid drive for energy conservation ，to the point of introducing car-free Sundays and asking businesses to switch off lights during closing hours． Eventually the Mideast oil started flowing again ，and the Danes themselves began enjoying the benefits of the petroleum and natural

　　gas in their slice of the North Sea． It was enough to make them more than self-sufficient． But unlike most other countries ，Denmark never forgot the lessons of l973 ，and kept driving for greater energy efficiency and a more diversified energy supply． The Danish parliament raised taxes on energy to encourage conservation and established subsidies and standards to support more efficient buildings ．“ It all started out without any regard for the climate or the environment，”says SvendAuken ，the former head of Denmark ?s opposition Social Democrat Party and the architect of the countrys environmental policies in the 1990s ．“ But today there?s a consensus that we need to build renewable power."

　　To the rest of the world ， Denmark has the power of its example ．showing that you can stay rich and grow green at the same time ．“ Denmark has proven that acting on climate can be a positive experience，not just painful, ”says NRDCs Schmidt ． The real paincould comefromfailing to follow in their footsteps ．

　　21．Which of the following is NOT cited as a main reason for Denmarks world leadership in wind power?

　　A ． Technology． B． Wind ． C．Government drive ． D． Geographical location ．22． The author has detailed some of the efforts of the Danish Government in promoting the wind industry in order to show

　　A ． the government ’ S determination ．

　　B ． the country ’S subsidy and loan policies ．

　　C． the importance of export to the country ．

　　D ． the role of taxation to the economy ．

　　23． What does the author mean by“ Denmarks example couldn ?t be more timely ” ?

　　A ．Denmarks energy-saving efforts cannot be followed by other countries．

　　B ． Denmark can manufacture more wind turbines for other countries．

　　C． Denmarks energy-saving Success offers the world a useful model ．

　　D ．Denmark aims to show the world that it can develop even faster ．

　　24． According to the passage， Denmarks energy-saving policies originatedfromA ． the countrys long tradition of environmental awareness ．

　　B ． the countrys previous experience of oil shortage ．

　　C． the countrys grave shortage of natural resources．

　　D ． the countrys abundant wind resources ．

　　25． Which of the following is NOT implied in the passage?

　　A ．Not to save energy could lead to serious consequences．

　　B ． Energy saving cannot go together with economic growth ．

　　C． Energy saving efforts can be painful but positive ．

　　D ．Denmark is a powerful leader in the global wind market．

　　TEXT D

　　The first clue came when I got my hair cut ．The stylist offered not just the usual coffee or tea buta complimentary nail — polish change while 1 waited for my hair to dry．Maybe she hoped this little amenity would slow the growing inclination of women to stretch each haircut to last four

　　months while nursing our hair back to whatever natural colour we long ago forgot．

　　Then there was the appliance salesman who offered to carry my bags as we toured the microwave aisle ．When I called my husband to ask him to check somespecs online，the salesman offered a pre-emptive discount， lest the surfing turn up the same model cheaper in another store．That night ，for the first time ，I saw the Hyundai ad promising shoppers that if they buy a car and then lose their job in the next year ， they can return it ．

　　Suddenly everything ’s on sale． The upside to the economic downturn is the immense

　　incentive it gives retailers to treat you like a queen for a day ．During the flush times ．Salespeople were surly ，waiters snobby ．But now the customer rules ，just for showing up ．There’s more room to stretch out on the flight ， even in a coach． The malls have that serene aura of undisturbed wilderness，with scarcely a shopper in sight ．Every conversation with anyone selling anything is a pantomime of pain and bluff ．Finger the scarf, then start to walk away, and its price floats silkily downward ． When the mechanic calls to tell you that brakes and a timing belt and other services will run close to $2,000 ，its time to break out the newly perfected art of the considered pause ．You really dont even have to say anything pitiful before hell offer to knock a few hundred dollars off ． Restaurants are also caught in a fit of ardent hospitality, especially around Wall Street：

　　Trinity Place offers $3 drinks at happy hour any day the market goes down． with the slogan “Market tanked? Get tanked! ”--which ensures a lively crowd for the closing bell ．The "21" Club has decided that men no longer need to wear ties，so long as they bring their wallets ．Food itself is friendlier ： you noticemore comfort food ， a truce between chef and patron that is easier to enjoy now that you can get a table practically anywhere ．New York Times restaurant critic Frank Bruni characterizes the new restaurant demeanor as "extreme solicitousness tinged with outright desperation． "“ You need to hug the customer,” one owner told him ．

　　Theres a chance that eventually well return a11 this kindness with the extravagant spending that was once decried but now everyone is hoping will restart the economy．But human nature is funny that way ．In dangerous times，we clench and squint at the deal that looks too good to miss ， suspecting that it must be too good to be true ． Is the store with the super cheap flat screens going to go bust and thus not be there to honour the "free" extended warranty? Is there something wrong with that free cheese? Store owners will tell you horror stories about shoppers with attitude ，whowalk in demanding discounts and flaunt their new power at every turn ． These store owners wince as they sense bad habit forming：Will people expect discounts forever? Will their hard ．won brand luster be forever cheapened， especially for items whose allure depends on their being ridiculously priced?

　　There willsurely come a day when things go back to “normal ”；retail sales even inched up in January after sinking for the previous six months ．But 1 wonder what it will take for US to see those $545 Sigerson Morrison studded toe-ring sandals as reasonable? Bargain-hunting can be addictive regardless of the state of the markets ， and haggling is a low-risk ， high-value contact sport． Trauma digs deep into habit ， like my 85-year — old mother still calling her canned-goodscabinet“ the bomb shelter." The children of the First Depression were saving string and preaching sacrifice long after the skies cleared ． They came to be called the “ greatest generation." As we learn to be decent stewards of our resources， who knows whatmight come of it? We have lived in an age of wanton waste，and there is value in practicing conservation that goes far beyond our own bottom line ．

　　26． According to the passage， what does“ the first clue" suggest?

　　A ． Shops try all kinds of means to please customers ．

　　B ． Shops， large or small ， are offering big discounts ．

　　C． Women tendto have their hair cut less frequently ．

　　D ． Customers refrainfrombuying things impulsively．

　　27． Which of the following best depicts the retailers now?

　　A ． Bad-tempered．B． Highly motivated ．

　　C． Over-friendly ．D ． Deeply frustrated ．

　　28． What does the author mean by“ the newly perfected art of the considered pause ” ?

　　A ． Customers now rush to buy things on sale ．

　　29． According to the passage，“ shoppers... flaunt their new power at every turn" means that shoppers would

　　30. What is the authors main message in the last two paragraphs?

　　B. Ones life experience would turn into lifelong habits．

　　C. Customers should expect discounts for luxury goods．

　　D. The practice of frugality is of great importance．

　　PART IIIGENERAL KNOWLEDGE (10 MIN)

　　There are ten multiple-choice questions in this section ．Mark the best answer to each question on

　　ANSWER SHEET TWO ．

　　31． The fullofficial nameof Australia is

　　A ． The Republic of Australia ．B ．The Commonwealth of Australia ．

　　C． The Federation of Australia ．D． The Union of Australia ．

　　32. Canada is well known for all the following EXCEPT

　　A ． its mineral resources ．B ． its forest resources．

　　C． its fertile and arable land ．D． its heavy industries．

　　33． In the United States community colleges offer

　　A ． two-year programmes ．B ． four-year programmes ．

　　C． postgraduate studies．D． B． A ． or B ． S． degrees．

　　34.In ______， referenda in Scotland and Wales set up a Scottish parliament and a Wales assembly．

　　A ．2000B ． 1946C． 1997D. 1990

　　35． Which of the following clusters of words is an example of alliteration?

　　A ． A weak seat．B ． Safe and sound．

　　C． Knock and kick ．D． Coat and boat．

　　36． Who wrote Mrs ． Warrens Profession?

　　A ．John Galsworthy ．B ． William Butler Yeats ．

　　C． T． S． Eliot ．D． George Bernard Shaw ．

　　37． Sister Carrie by Theodore Dreiser is a(n)

　　A ． novel．B． short story ．

　　C． poem．D． autobiography ．

　　38． Which Of t11e following italicized parts is an inflectional morpheme?

　　A ．Unlock ．B ．Government．

　　C． Goes．D． Off-stage．

　　39． _____ is a language phenomenon in which words sound like what they refer to.

　　A ．OnomatopoeiaB． Collocation

　　C． DenotationD． Assimilation

　　40． The sentence "CIose your book and listen to me carefully!" performs a(n) ____ function．

　　A ． interrogativeB ． informative

　　C． performativeD ．directive

　　PART IVPROOF READING & ERROR CORRECTION (15 MIN)

　　The passage contains TEN errors． Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved ． You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the following way ：

　　For a wrong word ，underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at theendof the line ．

　　For a missing word ．mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at theendof the line ．

　　For an unnecessary word， cross the unnecessary word with a slash”／”and put the word in the blank provided at theendof the line ．

　　EXAMPLE

　　When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit ，(1)an

　　it never buys things in finished form and hangs(2)never

　　them on the wall ． When a natural history museum

　　wants an exhibition, it must often build it ．(3)exhibit

　　Proofread the given passage on ANSWER SHEET TWO as instructed ．

　　Psycho-linguistics isthe namegiven to the study of the psychological processes

　　involved in language. Psycholinguistics study understanding,

　　production and remembering language, and hence are concerned with

　　(1) _____

　　listening, reading, speaking, writing, and memory for language.

　　One reason why we take the language for granted is that it usually

　　happens so effortlessly, and most of time, so accurately.

　　Indeed, when you listen to someone to speaking, or looking at this page,

　　(2) ______

　　(3) ______

　　(4) ______

　　you normally cannot help but understand it. It is only in exceptional

　　circumstances we mightbecome aware ofthe complexity(5) ______

　　involved: if we are searching for a word but cannot remember it;

　　if a relative or colleague has had a stroke which has influenced(6) ______

　　their language; if we observe a child acquire language; if(7) ______

　　we try to learn a second language ourselves as an adu< or

　　if we are visually impaired or hearing-impaired or if we meet

　　anyone else who is. As we shall see, all these examples(8) ______

　　of what might be called “l(fā)anguage in exceptional circumstances ”

　　reveal a great deal about the processes evolved in speaking,(9) ______

　　listening, writing and reading. But given that language processes

　　were normally so automatic, we also need to carry out careful(10) ______

　　experiments to get at what is happening.

　　PART V TRANSLATION (60 MIN)

　　SECTION ACHINESE TO ENGLISH

　　Translate the following text into English． Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE．

　　生活就像一杯紅酒，熱愛生活的人會從其中品出無窮無盡的美妙。將它握在手中仔細觀

　　察，它的暗紅色中有血的感覺， 那正是生命的痕跡。抿一口留在口中回味， 它的甘甜中有一絲苦澀，如人生一般復雜迷離。喝一口下肚，余香沁人心脾，讓人終身受益。紅酒越陳越美

　　味，生活越豐富越美好。當人生走向晚年，就如一瓶待開封的好酒，其色彩是沉靜的，味道中充滿慷慨與智慧。

　　SECTION BENGLISH TO CHINESE

　　Translate the following text into Chinese ． Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE．The UN General Assembly, the central political forum ，is composed of 193 members， including virtually all the worlds nation-states． Two-thirds of its members are developing countries， which account for about three-quarters of the worlds population．

　　Reaching decisions is difficult ，especially since all agreements by custom must be reached by consensus． As a result ，important agreements are often held hostage by narrow special interests ， and most agreements are reached only by reducing them to theirlowest common denominators． But the real question is whether the major countries of the world will allow democracy to function at the highest level ．

　　The Security Council ， which is responsible for peace and security ， deals with issues of the greatest political importance ．The Council has only 15 members so it can meet frequently and deal with crises． Once impotent due to Cold War rivalries ， it has regained much of the authority accorded by the UN charter ．

　　PARTVIWRITING (45 MIN)

　　Is our society hostile to good people? According to a recent survey by China Youth Daily，76.1 percent of the respondents say that our current society provides a “ bad environment"for good people doing good things ．On the other hand，the more optimistic would argue that each individual should try his or her best to do good things and be nice to others, instead of waiting for the "social environment ” to improve ． So， what do you think? Is a sound social environment necessary for people to have high moral standards and be good to others?

　　Write an essay of about 400 words on the following topic：Is a sound social environment necessary for people to be good to others?

　　In the first part of your essay you should state clearly your main argument, and in the second part you should support your argument with appropriate details ． In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary ．

　　Marks will be awarded for content, organization ，language and appropriateness．Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks ． Write your essay on ANSWER SHEET FOUR ．

　　試聽力部分

　　Section A

　　1.checking their understanding

　　2.reflective on information

　　3.incomprehensible

　　4.what you read

　　5.organized

　　6.monitoring their understanding

　　7.differentiate

　　8.blame

　　9.performance

　　10.active learning

　　Section B

　　1.better education— greater mobility — more choices

　　2.shorter work hours was least chosen for being most important

　　3.the way in which the questions were designed

　　4.psychological reward is more important than material one

　　5.chances for advancement

　　Section C

　　6.passengers

　　7.renters can take a shower inside the box

　　8.police preventive measures for the carnival

　　9.early malnutrition and heart health ．

　　10.in the 1950s

　　試閱讀理解部分

　　The future of news Back to the coffee house

　　11.the appearance of advertisement in newspaper

　　12.more people are involved in finding, discussing and distributing news

　　13.planning the return to coffee-house news

　　14.optimistic and cautious

　　15.the participator nature of news

　　Paris in winter

　　16.regret

　　17.Fashionable Parisian women return to Paris

　　18.can be happy if they want

　　19.its implications for life

　　20.thoughtfulness

　　21.Geographic location

　　22.the government?s determination

　　23.denmark?s energy-saving success offers the world a useful model

　　24.the country?s previous experience of oil shortage

　　25.energy saving cannot go together with economic growth

　　26.shops try all kinds of means to please customers

　　27.Highly motivated

　　28.Customers have learned how to bargain

　　29.keep asking for more discounts

　　30.the practice of frugality is of great importance

　　人文知識

　　31.澳大利亞的全稱是：the commonwealth of Austrilia

　　32.加拿大以什么著稱， 除了什么以外 （礦產(chǎn)、森林、肥沃的土地） 。答案選 the heavy industries.

　　33.美國社區(qū)大學一般提供two-year 制課程

　　34.1997 年蘇格蘭、威爾斯全民公決各自有了自己的議會

　　35. 哪一個是頭韻法，答案： safe and sound

　　36誰寫的 Mrs. Warrens Profession ，答案是： George Bernard Shaw

　　37Sister Carrie 是神馬東東，答案： novel

　　38下面哪一個斜體部分為曲折語素，答案goes 里面的 es

　　39聽其音，知其意是神馬東東，答案：擬音Onomatopoeia

　　40" 關(guān)上課本，認真聽我講“起的啥作用，答案：directive

　　翻譯漢譯英

　　生活像一杯紅酒，熱愛生活的人會從中品出無窮的美妙。將它握在手中觀察，它的暗紅

　　有血的感覺，那正是生命的`痕跡。抿一口留在口中回味， 它的甘甜有一絲苦澀，如人生一般復雜迷離。 喝一口下肚， 余香潤人心肺， 讓人終受益。 紅酒越陳越美味， 生活越豐富越美好。當人生走向晚年，就如一瓶待開封的好酒，其色彩是沉靜的，味道中充滿慷慨于智慧。

　　Life is like a cup of wine; people who love it discover inexhaustible wondersfromit.

　　Hold in the hand and gaze at it, the dark red color is reminiscent of the blood, which is the impress of life.

　　Take a sip of it and appreciate the taste, the bittersweet flavor is exactly the same with life, whichis complicated and blurred.

　　Once the sip is swallowed, the lingering fragrance pleases the heart and refreshes the mind, leaving a person lifelong benefit.

　　There was a remarkable resemblance between life and wine: the tastebecomes more delicious as the wine mellows, just as life gets better as itbecomes more abundant.

　　Whenlife comes to twilight years, it looks calm and tastes full of wisdom and generosity, just like a bottle of wine to be savored.

　　翻譯英譯漢

　　聯(lián)合國代表大會，中心政治論壇，由193 個成員國組成，幾乎包括世界上所有國家，其中

　　三分之二的國家為發(fā)展中國家，占世界總?cè)丝诘乃姆种�三。通過決議非常困難，尤其是所有慣例決出的協(xié)議必須達成一致才能通過。結(jié)果就是重要的協(xié)議總是被狹隘的特殊利益所挾持，并且大部分協(xié)議都只是用來使自己的利益最大化。但真正的問題是世界上主要。是否愿意看到民主最大限度地開展。聯(lián)合國安理會，負責和平和安全，處理最重要的政治問題。安理會只有15 個成員國，所以能經(jīng)常性地應付危機。它曾一度由于冷戰(zhàn)對立而停擺，但已經(jīng)重新獲得了聯(lián)合國憲章給予的權(quán)利。

　　改錯題

　　1.production 改成 producing

　　2.去掉 the

　　3.去掉 accurately 前面的 so

　　4.looking 改為 look

　　5.we 前面加 that

　　6.去掉 colleague 后面的 has

　　7.their 改成 his

　　8.anyone 改成 pure 老師 someone

　　9.evolved 改成 involved

　　10.were 改成 are

　　作文參考范文

　　Is a sound social environment necessary for people to be good to others Helping others has always been a virtue in traditional Chinese culture, but nowadays many people dare not offer help to those in need, for fear of getting into trouble. The issue has aroused public debate over the climate of morality and credibility, and many people sigh over the moral degeneration. In my opinion, while social environment is necessary for people to be good to others, each individual should try his or her best to do good deeds and be sympathetic with others, instead of waiting for the environment to improve.

　　There is no denying that some tragic events turn out to be traps by people with evil intentions, so people arebecoming more risk-conscious and are more wary of traps and deceits. some people even wonder, Is our society hostile to good people?? The question may sound ridiculous but ma ny people apparently think so. They believe that our current society provides a bad environment for good people doing good things, and good people pay a high price forbeing compassionate. In fact, such kind of things only accounts for a pretty small percentage, but massive media coverage makes the situation seem serious. Actually, most people around me are kind, warm-hearted and helpful, and I am quite delighted intheir company. So I believe media should pay more attention

　　to publicizing good people and exemplary deeds to enhance our confidence, rather than exposing disgusting behaviors.

　　At the same time, as John Donne puts it,“ No man is an island, entire of itselfman.Everyisa piece of the continent, a part of the main.” Since everyoneponentofusof isthea scociety,m it is each individual?s conducts that form social morality. Just imagine it is you who need help, what would you feel if everyone watches indifferently or suspiciously? So, put yourself in other?sposition and be sympathetic. If we do nothing but wait for the environment to improve, nothing will happen. Only by removing the fence aroundour kind consciousness can we reverse the regress of social ethics, and make our world full of warmth and happiness. Therefore, if help is needed, never hesitate to lenda helping hand. It will make you happy and feel better about life.

　　In sum, I contendthe idea that while social environment is necessary for people to be good to others, it is each individual?s responsibility to offer help to those in need, and together we build up a more harmonious society.

　　Writing:

　　Say No to Pirated Products

　　No one can have failed to notice the fact that piracy hasbecome a grave problem with which we are confronted. Taking a look around, we can find examples too numerous to list. In many places we see people peddling pirated books or disks. There is hardly anyone who has not been asked the question: “ Wannaa disk? ” Actually,piracy hasbecome so widespread that it has severely affected people?s life and hindered the development of the nation?s economy and culture. A number of factors could be responsible for this phenomenon, but the following are the most critical ones. First, pirated products are much cheaper than copyrighted ones, so they are very attractive to people, especially youngsters, who are not financially well-off. Secondly, with highly developed technology, it is not difficult to manufacture pirated products. An average person can produce thousands of copies of a film only if he hasa computer and a recorder, which won?t cost him much. Last but not least, relevant laws are not in existence or in effect.

　　Piracy is bound to generate severe consequences if we keep turning a blind eye to it. First, intellectual property rights are severely infringed upon and honest producers will lose the motivation to develop new products. As a result, the nation?s economy and culture will stay where they are and see no progress. Meanwhile, pirated products are often of low quality, thus damaging the interest of buyers, especially customers who wish to purchase copyrighted products. Finally, the destruction of pirated products means a grievous waste of the nation?s resources. It is really upsetting to see thousands of pirated books burnt or millions of pirated DVDs of films and music crushed.

　　In view of the seriousness of the problem, effective measures must be taken before things get worse. First, it is essential that pertinent laws and regulations be worked out and rigidly enforced to ban the manufacture and circulation of pirated products. Mean while, a deep-going, widespread and everlasting campaign should be launched to enhance people?s awareness of protecting intellectual property rights and saying no to pirated products. With proper laws and an alert public, it will be only a matter of time before piracybecomes a thing of the past. /With these measures taken, we have reasons to believe that the problem can be solved in the near future./Only with these measures taken can we expect a bright future.

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷3

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the mini-lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening to the mini-lecture,please complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE and write NO MORE THAN THREE WORDS for each gap. Make sure what you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. You may use the blank sheet for note-taking.

　　You have THIRTY seconds to preview the gap-filling task.

　　Now, listen to the mini-lecture. When it is over, you will be given THREE minutes to check your work.

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　In this section you will hear TWO interviews. At theendof each interview, five questions will be asked about what was said. Both the interviews and the questions will be spoken ONCE ONLY. After each question there will be a ten-second pause During the pause, you should read the four choices of A, B, C and D, and mark the best answer to each question on ANSWERSHEET TWO.

　　You have THIRTY seconds to preview the choices.

　　Now, listen to the first interview. Questions 1 to 5 are based on the first interview.

　　1. A. Environmental issues.

　　B.Endangered species.

　　C.Global warming.

　　D.Conservation.

　　2. A. It is thoroughly proved.

　　B. it is definitely very serious.

　　C. It is just a temporary variation.

　　D. It is changing our ways of living.

　　3. A. Protection ofendangered animals*habitats.

　　B. Negative human impact on the environment.

　　C. Frequent abnormal phenomena on the earth.

　　D. The woman’s indifferent attitude to the earth.

　　4. A. Nature should take its course.

　　B. People take things for granted.

　　C. Humans are damaging the earth.

　　D. Animals should stay awayfromzoos.

　　5. A. Objective.

　　B. Pessimistic.

　　C. Skeptical.

　　D. Subjective.

　　Now, listen to the second interview. Questions 6 to 10 are based on the second interview.

　　6.A. Teachers’ resistance to change.

　　B. Students’ inadequate ability to read.

　　C. Teachers’ misunderstanding of such literacy.

　　D. Students ’ indifference to the new method.

　　7.A. Abilitiesto complete challenging tasks.

　　B.Abilities to learn subject matter knowledge.

　　C.Abilities to perform better in schoolwork.

　　D.Abilities to perform disciplinary work.

　　8.A. Recalling specific information.

　　B. Understanding particular details.

　　C. Examining sources of information.

　　D. Retelling a historical event.

　　9. A. Engaging literacy and disciplinary experts in the program.

　　B. Helping teachers understand what disciplinary literacy is.

　　C. Teaching disciplinary discourse practices by literacy teachers.

　　D. Designing learning strategies with expertsfromboth sides.

　　10. A. To argue for a case.

　　B. To discuss a dispute.

　　C. To explain a problem.

　　D. To present details.

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

　　In this section there are three passages followed by fourteen multiple choice questions. For each multiple choice question, there are four suggested answers marked A, B, C and D. Choose the one that you think is the best answer and mark your answers on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　(1)When it came to concealing his troubles, Tommy Wilhelm was not less capable than die next fellow. So at least he thought, and there was a certain amount of evidence to back him up. He had once been an actor^ no, not quite, an extra — and he knew what acting should be. Also, he was smoking a cigar, and when a man is smoking a cigar, wearing a hat, he has an advantage; it is harder to find out how he feels. He camefromthe twenty-third floor down to the lobby on the mezzanine to collect his mail before breakfast, and he believed^ he hoped — that he looked passably well: doing all right. It was a matter of sheer hope, because there was not much that he could add to his present effort. On the fourteenth floor he looked for his father to enter the elevator; they often met at this hour, on the way to breakfast. If he worried about his appearance it was mainly for his old father’s sake. But there was no stop on the fourteenth, and the elevator sank and sank. Then the smooth door opened and the great dark-red uneven carpet that covered the lobby billowed toward Wilhelm’s feet. In the foreground the lobby was dark, sleepy. French drapes like sails kept out the sun, but three high, narrow windows were open, and in the blue air Wilhelm saw a pigeon about to light on the great chain that supported the marquee of the movie house directly underneath the lobby. For one moment he heard the wings beating strongly.

　　(2)Most of the guests at the Hotel Gloriana were past the age of retirement. Along Broadway in the Seventies, Eighties, and Nineties, a great part of New York’s vast population of old men and women lives. Unless the weather is too cold or wet they fill the benches about the tiny railed parks and along the subway gratingsfromVerdi Square to Columbia University, they crowd the shops and cafeterias, the dime stores, the tearooms, the bakeries, the beauty parlors, the reading roomsand clubrooms. Among these old people at the Gloriana, Wilhelm felt out of

　　place. Hewas comparatively young, in his middle forties, large and blond, with big shoulders; his back was heavy and strong, if already a little stooped or thickened. After breakfast the old guests sat down on the green leather armchairs and sofas in the lobby and began to gossip and look into the.papers; they had nothing to do but wait out the day. But Wilhelm was used to an active life and liked to go out energetically in the morning. And for several months, because he had no position, he had kept up his morale by rising early; he was shaved and in the lobby by eight oclock. He bought the paper and some cigars and drank a Coca-Cola or two before he went in to

　　breakfast with his father. After breakfast 一 out, out, out to attendto business. The getting out had in itself

　　become the chief business. But he had realized that he could not keep this up much longer, and today he was afraid. He was aware that his routine was about to break up and he sensed that a huge trouble long presaged (預感)but till now formless was due. Before evening, hed know.

　　(3)Nevertheless he followed his daily course and crossed the lobby.

　　(4)Rubin, the man at the newsstand, had poor eyes. They may not have been actually weak but they were poor in expression, with lacy lids that furled down atthe comers. He dressed well. It didnt seem necessary 一 he was behind the counter most of the time — but he dressed very well. He had on a rich brown suit; the cuffs embarrassed the hairs on his small hands. He wore a Countess Mara painted necktie. As Wilhelm approached, Rubin did not see him; he was looking out dreamily at the Hotel Ansonia, which was visiblefromhis comer, several blocks away. The Ansonia, the neighborhood^ great landmark, was built by Stanford White. It looks like a baroque palacefromPrague or Munich enlarged a hundred times, with towers, domes, huge swells and bubbles of metal gone greenfromexposure, iron fretwork and festoons. Black television antennae are densely planted on its round summits. Under the changes of weather it may look like marble or like sea water, black as slate in the fog, white as tufa in sunlight. This morning it looked like the image of itself reflected in deep water, white and cumulous above, with cavernous distortions underneath. Together, the two men gazed at it.

　　(5)Then Rubin .said，“Your dad is in to breakfast already, the old gentleman.”

　　“Oh，yes? Ahead of me today?”

　　‘nat’s a real knocked-out shirt you got on，’’ said Rubin. “Where’s itfrom，Saks?” “No, it’s a Jack Fagman — Chicago.”

　　(6)Even when his spirits were low, Wilhelm could still wrinkle his forehead in a pleasing way. Some of the slow，silent movements of his face were very attractive. He went back a step, as if to stand awayfromhimself and get a better look at his shirt. His glancewas comic,a comment upon his untidiness. He liked to wear good clothes, but once he had put it on each article appeared to go its own way. Wilhelm, laughing，panted a little; his teeth were small; his cheeks when he laughed and puffed grew round, and he looked much younger than his years. In the old days when he was a college freshman and wore a beanie (無檐小帽）on his large blonde head his father used to say that，big as he was，he could charm a bird out of a tree. Wilhelm had great charm still.

　　(7)“I like this dove-gray color,” he said in his sociable，good-natured way. “It isn’t washable. You

　　have to sendit to the cleaner. It never smells as good as washed. But it，s a nice shirt. It cost sixteen, eighteen bucks.*

　　11.Wilhelm hoped he looked all right on his way to the lobby because he wanted to _ .

　　A.leave a good impression

　　B.give his father a surprise

　　C.show his acting potential

　　D.disguise his low spirit

　　12.Wilhelm had somethingin common with the old guests in that they all .

　　A.lived a luxurious life

　　B.liked to swap gossips

　　C.idled their time away

　　D.liked to get up early

　　13.How did Wilhelm feel when he was crossing the lobby (Para. 2)?

　　A.He felt something ominouswas coming.

　　B.He was worried that his father was late.

　　C.He was feeling at ease among the old.

　　D.He was excited about a possible job offer.

　　14.Which part of Rubin’s clothes made him look particularly awkward (Para. 4)?

　　A.The necktie.

　　B.The cuffs.

　　C.The suit.

　　D.The shirt.

　　15.What can we learnfromthe author’s description of Wilhelm’s clothes?

　　A.His shirt made him look better.

　　B.He cared much about his clothes.

　　C.He looked likea comedian in his shirt.

　　D.The clothes he wore never quite matched.

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　(1)By the 1840s New York was theleading commercial city of the United States. It had long since outpaced Philadelphia as the largest city in the country, and even though Boston continued to be venerated as the cultural capital of the nation, its image hadbecome somewhat languid; it had not kept up with the implications of the newly industrialized economy, of a diversified ethnic population, or of the rapidly rising middle class. New York was the place where the “new” Americawas coming into being, so it is hardly surprising that the modem newspaper had its birth there.

　　(2)The penny paper had found its first success in New York. By the mid-1830s Ben Day s Sun was drawing readersfromall walks of life. On the other hand, the Sun was a scanty sheet providing little more than minor diversions; few today would call it a newspaper at all. Day himself was an editor of limited vision, and he did not possess the ability or the imagination to climb the slopes to loftier heights. If real newspapers were to emergefromthe publics demand for more and better coverage, it would haveto comefroma youthful generation of editors for whom journalism was a totally absorbing profession, an exacting vocational ideal rather than a mere offshoot of job printing.

　　(3)By the 1840s two giants burst into the field, editors who would revolutionize journalism, would bring the newspaper into the modem age, and show how it could be influential in the national life. These two giants, neither of whom has been treated kindly by history, were James Gordon Bennett and Horace Greeley. Bennett founded his New York Herald in 1835, less than two years after the appearance of the Sun. Horace Greeley founded his Tribune in 1841. Bennett and Greeley were the most innovative editors in New York until after the Civil War. Their newspapers were the leading American papers of the day, althoughfor completely different reasons. The two men despised each other, although not in the ways that newspaper editors had despised one another a few years before. Neither was a political hack bonded to a political party. Greeley fancied himself a public intellectual. He had strong political views, and he wanted to run for office himself, but party factotum he could never be; he bristled with ideals and causes of his own devising. Officially he was a Whig (and later a Republican), but he seldomgave comfort to his chosen party. Bennett, on the other hand, had long since cut his political ties, and although his paper covered local and national politics fully and he went after politicians with hammer and tongs, Bennett was a cynic, a distruster of all settled values. He did not regard himself as an intellectual, although in fact he wasbetter educated than Greeley. He thought himself only a hard-boiled newspaperman. Greeley was interested in ideas and in what was happening to the country. Bennett was only interested in his newspaper. He wanted to find out what the news was, what people wanted to read. And when he found out he gave it to them.

　　(4)As different as Bennett and Greeley werefromeach other they were also curiously alike. Both stood outside the circle of polite society, even when they became prosperous, and in Bennett’s case, wealthy. Both were incurable eccentrics. Neither was a gentleman. Neither conjured up the picture of a successful editor. Greeley was unkempt, always looking like an unmade bed. Even when he was nationally famous in the 1850s he resembled a clerk in a third-rate brokerage house, with slips of paper — marked-up proofs perhaps — hanging out of his pockets or stuck in his hat. He became fat, was always nearsighted, always peering over spectacles. He spoke in a high-pitched whine Not a few people suggested that he looked exactly like the illustrations of Charles Dickens’s Mr. Pickwick. Greeley provided a humorous description of himself, written under the pretense that it had been the work of his long-time adversary James Fenimore Cooper. The editor was, according to the description, a half-bald, long-legged, slouching individual “so rocking in gait that he walks down both sides of the street at once.”

　　(5)The appearance of Bennett was somewhat different but hardly more reassuring. A shrewd, wiry Scotsman, who seemed to repel intimacy, Bennett looked around at the world with a squinty glare of suspicion. His eyes did not focus right. They seemed to fix themselves on nothing and everything at the same time. He was as solitary as an oyster, the classic loner. He seldom made close friendships and few people trusted him, although nobody who had dealings with him, however brief, doubted his abilities. He, too, couldhave come out of a book of Dickensian eccentrics, although perhaps Ebenezer Scrooge or Thomas Gradgrind comes to mind rather than the kindly old Mr. Pickwick. Greeley was laughed at but admired; Bennett was seldom laughed at but never admired; on the other hand, he had a hardprofessional competence and an encyclopedic knowledge of his adopted country, an in-depth learning uncorrupted by vague idealisms. All of this perfectly suited him for the journalism of this confusing age.

　　(6)Both Greeley and Bennett had served long, humiliating and disappointing apprenticeships in the newspaper business. They took a long time getting to the top, the only reward for the long years of waiting being that when they had their own newspapers, both knew what they wanted and firmly set about getting it. When Greeley founded the Tribune in 1841 he had the strong support of the Whig party and had already had a short period of modest success as an editor. Bennett, older by sixteen years, foundsolid commercial success first, but he had no one behind him except himself when he started up the Herald in 1835 in a dingy cellar room at 20 Wall Street. Fortunately this turned out to be quite enough.

　　16.Which of the following is NOT the author’s opinion on Ben Day and his Sun (Para. 2)7

　　A.Sun had once been a popular newspaper.

　　B.Sun failed to be a high-quality newspaper.

　　C.Ben Day lacked innovation and imagination.

　　D.Ben Day had striven for better coverage.

　　17.Which of the following statements is CORRECT about Greeley’s or Bennett’s political stance (Para. 3)7

　　A.Greeley and Bennett were both strong supporters of their party.

　　B.Greeley, as a Whig member, believed in his party’s ideals.

　　C.Bennett, as an independent, loathed established values.

　　D.Greeley and Bennett possessed different political values.

　　18.Which of the following figures of speech was used to describe Greeley’s manner of walking (Para. 4)?

　　A.Exaggeration.

　　B.Paradox.

　　C.Analogy.

　　D.Personification.

　　19.In Para. 5 Bennett was depicted as a man who

　　A.had stronger capabilities than Greeley

　　B.possessed a great aptitude for journalism

　　C.was in pursuit of idealism in journalism

　　D.was knowledgeable about his home country

　　20.How was Greeley differentfromBennett according to Para. 6?

　　A.He had achieved business success first.

　　B.He started his career earlier than Bennett.

　　C.He got initial supportfroma political party.

　　D.He had a more humiliating apprenticeship.

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　(1)Why make a film about Ned Kelly? More ingenious crimes thanthose committed by the reckless Australian bandit are reported every day. What is there in Ned Kelly to justify dragging the mesmeric Mick Jagger so far into the Australian bush and awayfromhis natural haunts? The answer is that the film makers know we always fall for a bandit, and Jagger is set to do for bold Ned Kelly what Brando once did for the arrogant Emiliano Zapata.

　　(2) A bandit inhabits a special realm of legendwhere his deeds are embroidered by others; where his death rather than his life is considered beyond belief; where the men who bring him to “justice” are afflicted with doubts about their role.

　　(3)The bandits had a role to play as definite as that of the authorities who condemned them. These were men in conflict with authority, and, in the absence of strong law or the idea of loyal opposition, they took to the hills. Even there, however, many of them obeyed certain unwritten rules

　　(4)These robbers, who claimed to be something more than mere thieves, hadin common, firstly, a sense of loyalty and identity with the peasants they camefrom. They didnt steal the peasant’s harvest; they did steal the lord’s.

　　(5)And certain characteristics seem to apply to “social bandits’’ whether they were in Sicily or Peru. They were generally young men under the age of marriage, predictably the best age for dissidence. Some were simply the surplus male population who had to look for another source ofincome; others were runaway serfs or ex-soldiers; a minority, though the most interesting, were outstanding men who were unwilling to accept the meek and passive role of peasant.

　　(6)They usually operated in bands between ten and twenty strong and relied for survival on difficult terrain and bad transport. And bandits prospered best where authority was merely local — over the next hill and they were free. Unlike the general run of peasantry they had a taste for flamboyant dress and gesture; but they usually shared the peasants’ religious beliefs and superstitions.

　　(7)The first sign of a man caught up in the Robin Hood syndrome was when he started out, forced into outlawry as a victim of injustice; and when he then set out to “right wrongs”, first his own and then other people’s. The classic bandit then “takesfromthe rich and gives to the poor” in conformity with his own sense of social injustice; he never kills except in self-defense or justifiable revenge; he stays withinhis community and even returns to it if he can to take up an honorable place; his people admire and help to protect him; he dies through the treason of one of them; he behaves as if invisible and invulnerable; he is a “l(fā)oyalist”, never the enemy of the king but only of the local oppressors.

　　(8)None of die bandits lived up fully to this image of the “noble robber” and for many the claim of larger motives was often a delusion.

　　(9)Yet amazingly, many of these violent men did behave at least half the time in accordance with this idealist pattern. Pancho Villa in Mexico and Salvatore Giuliano in Italy began their careers harshly victimized. Many of their charitable acts later became legends.

　　(10)Farfrombeing defeated in death, bandits’ reputation for invincibility was often strengthened by the manner of their dying. The “dirty little coward” who shot Jesse James in the back is in every ballad about him, and the implication is that nothing else could have brought Jesse down. Even when the police claimed the credit, as they tried to do at first with Giuliano’s death, the local people refused to believe it. And not just the bandit’s vitality prompts the people to refuse to believe that their hero has died; his death would be in some way the death of hope.

　　(11)For the traditional ‘‘noble robber” represents an extremely primitive form of social protest, perhaps the most primitive there is. He is an Individual who refuses to bendhis back, that is all. Most protesters will eventually be bought over and persuadedto come to terms with the official power. That is why the few who do not, or who are believed to have remained uncontaminated, have so great and passionate a burden of admiration and longing laid upon them. They cannot abolish oppression. But they do prove that justice is possible, that poor men need not be humble, helpless and meek.

　　(12)The bandit in the real world is rooted in peasant society and when its simple agricultural system is left behind so is he. But the tales and legends, the books and films continue to appear for an audience that is neither peasant nor bandit. In some ways the characters and deeds of the great bandits could so readily be the stuff of grand opera - Don Jose in “Carmen” is based on the Andalusian bandit El Empranillo. But they are perhaps more at home in folk songs, in popular tales and the ritual dramas of films. When we sit in the darkness of the cinema to watch the bold deeds of Ned Kelly we are caught up in admiration for their strong individuality, their simple gesture of protest, their passion for justice and their confidence that they cannot be beaten. This sustains us nearly as much as it did the almost hopeless peoplefromwhom they sprang.

　　21.Which of the following words is NOT intended to suggest approval of bandits?

　　A.Bold (Para. 1).

　　B.Claimed (Para. 4).

　　C.Legend(Para. 2).

　　D.Loyalty (Para. 4).

　　22. Of the following reasons which is the LEAST likely one forbecoming bandits?

　　A.They liked theatrical clothes and behavior.

　　B.They wanted to help the poor country folk.

　　C.They were unwilling to accept injustice.

　　D.They had very few careers open to them.

　　23. ....began their careers harshly victimized” (Para. 9) means that they .

　　A.had received excessive ill-treatment

　　B.were severely punished for their crimes

　　C.took to violence through a sense of injustice

　　D.were misunderstood by their parents and friends

　　24. What has made bandits suitable as film heroes is that they .

　　A.are sure they are invincible

　　B.possess a theatrical quality

　　C.retain the virtues of a peasant society

　　D.protest against injustice and inequality

　　SECTION B SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

　　In this section there are eight short answer questions based on the passages in Section A. Answer each question in NO MORE THAN TEN WORDS in the space provided on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　25.In and there was a certain amount of evidence to back him up (Para. 1)”, what does “evidence” refer to?

　　26.What is Wilhelm’s characteristic that has never changed all those years according to Para. 6?

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　27.Summarize in your own words the meaning of the italicized part in the last sentence of Para. 2.

　　28.What does but he seldomgave comfort to his chosen party” mean according to the context (Para. 3)?

　　29.What is the similarity between Bennett and Greeley according to Paras. 4 and 5?

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　30.Write down TWO features of the idealist pattern. (Para 9)

　　31.What does “hope” mean according to the context? (Para 10)

　　32.What does “He is an individual who refuses to bendhis back” mean? (Para 11)

　　PART III LANGUAGE USAGE

　　The passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the following way:

　　PART IV TRANSLATION

　　Translate the following textfromChinese into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　白洋淀曾有 " 北國江南 " 的說法，但村舍的形制自具特色，與江南截然不同。南方多雨，屋頂是坡頂；這里的村舍則不同，屋頂是曬糧食的`地方，而且歷史上淀里每逢水大洪泛，村民就得把屋里的東西搬到屋頂上。房屋彼此挨得很近，有些屋頂幾乎相連。（節(jié)選自 馮驥才《白洋淀之憂》）

　　PART V WRITING

　　Read carefully the following two excerpts on consumption, and the in NO LESS THAN300 WORDS, in which you should: to your response

　　1. Summarize the main message of the two excerpts, and then2. comment on the role of consumption in human society, especially on what consumption may lead to desirable or undesirable results.

　　You can support yourself with informationfromthe excerpts.

　　Marks will be awarded for content relevance, content sufficiency, organization and language quality.

　　Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your response on ANSWER SHEETFOUR.

　　Excerpt 1

　　Consequences of consumerism

　　In Human Development Report 1998 Overview by the United Nations Development Program (UNDP), “World consumption has expanded at an unprecedented pace over the 20th century, with private and public consumption expenditures reaching $24 trillion in 1998, twice the level of 1975 and six times that of 1950. In 1900 real consumption expenditure was barely $1.5 trillion.”

　　In September2001, the BBC aired a documentary called “Shopology,” where psychologists looked into the psychology of shopping and consumerism in countries like Britain, USA and Japan and asked if it was healthy for consumers. Of the many points they raised, they observed that:

　　Consumption now helps to define who we are;

　　We essentially “buy” a lifestyle;

　　Consumerism can increase stress for various reasons;

　　To deal with social and consumerism pressures and their effects, people may on occasion consume even more to feel better;

　　Rising consumer debt puts pressure on families.

　　Two years later, the BBC aired another documentary called “Spend, Spend, Spend.” It looked at the issues of whether or not the increased wealth and consumerism had led to more content and satisfied individuals. The documentary observed that research evidence seemed to suggest that increased wealth did not necessarily lead to more satisfaction in Britain. When interviewed in the program, Professor Andrew Oswald of Warwick University said that the key reason for this was because as we get wealthier there is often a tendencyto compare more with others, which contributes to more anxiety. The “keeping up with the Joneses’ syndrome. The implications of this are profound. As Oswald suggested, it is “hard to make society happier as they get richer and richer because human beings look constantly over their shoulders. That s the curse of human beings;making comparisons.”

　　Excerpt 2

　　Consumption as a path to cultivation

　　Consumption, for George Simmel, German sociologist and philosopher, lies at the heart of the process through which peoplebecome cultivated, that is, grow tobecome participating, reflective members of society. This is because consumption provides anexcellent sitefor the interaction between subject and object, which Simmel believed to be the key to cultivation. Subjectivity, the uniquely human capacity for self-reflection, which allows for the self-conscious construction of action and identity, is not naturallyendowed; it only develops through the creative tension provided by interaction with objects (including people) existing in the world. For Simmel, consumption provides a vital forum for this subject-object interaction. Through consumption,people come to understand, instill meaning in, and act upon objects encountered in the world. Consumption provides people with the opportunity to refine themselves through interaction with objects in the world. In addition, by confronting, adapting, and integrating various world-views directly or indirectly demonstrated in consumption objects, people not only realize their potential as unique human beings, they alsobecome well-socialized members of a society.

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷4

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION (35 MIN)

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need themto complete a gap-filling task after the mini-lecture. When the lecture is over, you will be given two minutes to check your notes, and another ten minutesto complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE, using no more than three words in each gap. Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are) both grammatically and semantically acceptable. You may refer to your noteswhile completing the task. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. Now, listen to the mini-lecture．

　　Understanding Academic Lectures

　　Listening to academic lectures is an important task for university students. Then, how canwe comprehenda lecture efficiently?

　　I. Understand all (1) _______

　　A. words

　　B. (2) _______

　　—stress

　　—intonation

　　—(3) _______

　　II. Adding information

　　A. lectures: Sharing information with audience

　　B. listeners: (4) _______

　　C. sources of information

　　—knowledge of (5) _______

　　—(6) _______of the world

　　D. listening involving three steps:

　　—hearing

　　—(7) _______

　　—adding

　　III. (8) _______

　　A. reasons

　　—overcome noise

　　—save time

　　B. (9) _______

　　—content

　　—organization

　　IV. Evaluating while listening

　　A. help to decide the (10) of notes

　　B. help to remember information

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　In this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Questions 1 to 5 are based on an interview. At theendof the interview you will be given 10 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the interview.

　　1. Theresa thinks that the present government is ________.

　　[A] doing what they have promised to schools

　　[B] creating opportunities for leading universities

　　[C] considering removing barriers for state school pupils

　　[D] reducing opportunities for state school pupils

　　2. What does Theresa see as a problem in secondary schools now?

　　[A] Universities are not working hard to accept state school pupils.

　　[B] The number of state pupils applying to Oxford fails to increase.

　　[C] The government has lowered state pupils’ expectations.

　　[D] Leading universities are rejecting state school pupils.

　　3. In Theresa’s view, school freedom means that schools should ____.

　　[A] be given more fundingfromeducation authorities

　　[B] be given all the money and decide how to spendit

　　[C] be granted greater power to run themselves

　　[D] be given more opportunities and choices

　　4. According to Theresa, who decides or decide money for schools at the present?

　　[A] Local education authorities and the central government.

　　[B] Local education authorities and secondary schools together.

　　[C] Local education authorities only.

　　[D] The central government only.

　　5. Throughout the talk, the interviewer does all the following EXCEPT ____.

　　[A] asking for clarification

　　[B] challenging the interviewee

　　[C] supporting the interviewee

　　[D] initiating topics

　　SECTION C NEWS BROADCAST

　　In this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY．Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Questions 6 and 7 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions. Now listen to the news.

　　News Item 1

　　6. What is the main idea of the news item?

　　[A] Fewer people watch TV once a week.

　　[B] Smartphones and tablets have replaced TV.

　　[C] New technology has led to more family time.

　　[D] Bigger TV sets have attracted more people.

　　News Item 2

　　7. How many lawmakers voted for the marijuana legalization bill?

　　[A] 50. [B] 12.

　　[C] 46. [D] 18.

　　8. The passing of the bill means that marijuana can be________.

　　[A] bought by people under 18

　　[B] made available to drug addicts

　　[C] provided by the government

　　[D] bought in drug stores

　　News Item 3

　　9. What did the review of global data reveal?

　　[A]Diarrhea isa common disease.

　　[B]Good sanitation led to increase in height.

　　[C]There were many problems of poor sanitation.

　　[D] African children live in worse sanitary conditions.

　　10. The purpose of Dr. Alan Dangour’s study was most likely to ________.

　　[A] examine links between sanitation and deathfromillness

　　[B] look into factors affecting the growth of children

　　[C] investigate how to tackle symptoms like diarrhea

　　[D] reviewand compare conditions in different countries

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION (30 MIN)

　　In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of 20 multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO．

　　TEXT A

　　In2011, many shoppers chose to avoid the frantic crowds and do their holiday shoppingfromthe comfort oftheir computer. Salesat onlineretailers gained by more than 15%, making it the biggest season ever. But people are also returning those purchases at record rates, up 8%fromlast year.

　　What went wrong? Is the lingering shadow of the global financial crisis making it harder to accept extravagant indulgences? Or that people shop more impulsively - and therefore make bad decisions -when online? Both arguments are plausible. However, there is a third factor: a question of touch. We can love the look but, inan onlineenvironment, we cannot feel the quality of a texture, the shape of the fit, the fall of a fold or, for that matter, the weight of an earring. And physically interacting with an object makes youmore committed.

　　When my most recent book Brand washed was released, I teamed up with a local bookstore to conduct an experiment about the differences betweenthe onlineand offline shopping experience. I carefully instructed a group of volunteers to promote my book in two different ways. The first was a fairly hands-off approach. Whenever a customer would inquire about my book, the volunteer would take them over to the shelf and point to it. Out of 20 such requests, six customers proceeded with the purchase.

　　The second option also involved going over to the shelf but, this time, removing the book and then subtly holding onto it for just an extra moment before placing it in the customers hands. Of the 20 people who were handed the book. 13ended up buying it. Just physically passing the book showed a big difference in sales. Why? We feel something similar to a sense of ownership when we hold things in our hand. Thats why we establish or reestablish connection by greeting strangers and friends with a handshake. In this case, having to then let go of the book after holding it might generate a subtle sense of loss, and motivate us to make the purchase even more.

　　A recent study also revealed the power of touch, in this case when it came to conventional mail. A deeper and longer-lasting impression of a message was formed when delivered in a letter, as opposed to receiving the samemessage online. Brain imaging showed that, on touching the paper, the emotional center of the brain was activated, thus forming a stronger bond. The study also indicated that once touchbecomes part of the process, it could translate into a sense of possession. This sense of ownership is simply not part of the equation inthe onlineshopping experience.

　　As the rituals of purchase in the lead-up to Christmas change, not only do we give less thought to the type of gifts we buy for our loved ones but, through our own digital wish lists, we increasingly control what they buy for us. The reality, however, is that no matter how convinced we all are that digital is the way to go, finding real satisfaction will probably take more than a few simple clicks.

　　11. According to the author, shoppers are returning their purchases for all the following reasons EXCEPT that ____.

　　[A] they are unsatisfied with the quality of the purchase

　　[B]they eventually find the purchase too expensive

　　[C] they change their mind out of uncertainty

　　[D] they regret making the purchase without forethought

　　12. What is the purpose of the experiment in the bookstore?

　　[A] To see which promotion method is preferred by customers.

　　[B]To find out the strengths and weaknesses of both methods.

　　[C] To try to set up a new retailer-customer relationship.

　　[D] To see the effect of an approach on customers decisions.

　　13. Why does the author cite the study by Bangor University and the Royal Mail Service?

　　[A]To compare similar responses in different settings.

　　[B] To provide further evidence for his own observation.

　　[C] To offer a scientific account of the brains functions.

　　[D] To describe emotional responsesin onlineshopping.

　　14. What can be inferredfromthe last paragraph?

　　[A]Real satisfaction depends on factors other thanthe computer.

　　[B] Despite onlineshopping we still attach importance to gift buying.

　　[C] Some people are still uncertain about the digital age.

　　[D] Online shopping offers real satisfaction to shoppers.

　　Text B

　　My professor brother and I have an argument about head and heart about whether he overvalues IQ while I learn more toward EQ. We typically have this debate about people—can we be friends with a really smart jerk（怪物）?—but there’s corollary to animals as well. I’d love it if our dog could fetch the morning paper and then read it to me over coffee, but I actually care much more about her loyal and innocent heart. There’s already enough thinking going on is our house, and we probably spendtoo much time in our heads, where we need some role modeling is in instinct, and that’s where a dog is a roving revelation.

　　I did not grow up with dogs, which meant that my older daughter’s respectful but unyielding determination to get one required some adjustment on my part. I often felt she was training me:fromages of 6 to 9, she gently schooled me in various breeds and their personalities, whispered to the dogs we encountered so they would charm and persuade me, demonstrated by her self-discipline that she was ready for the responsibility. And thus came our dog Twist, whom I sometimes mistake for a third daughter.

　　At first I thought the challenge would be to train her to sit, to heel, to walk calmly beside us and not go wildly chasing the neighborhood rabbits. But I soon discovered how much more we had to learnfromher than shefromus.

　　If it is true, for example, that the secret to a child’s success is less rare genius than raw persistence, Twist’s ability to stay on task is a model for us all, especially if the task is trying to capture the sunbeam that flicks around the living room as the wind blows through the branches outside. She never succeeds, and she never gives up. This includes when she runs square into walls.

　　Then there is her unfailing patience, which breaks down only when she senses that dinnertime was 15 minutes ago and we have somehow failed to notice. Even then she is more eager than indignant, and her refusal to whine shows a restraint of which I’m not always capable when hungry.

　　But the lesson I value most is the one in forgiveness, and Twist first offered this when she was still very young. When she was about 7 months old, we took her to the vet to be sprayed(切除卵巢). We turned her over to a stranger, who proceeded to perform aprocedure that was probably not pleasant, But when the vet returned her to us, limp and tender, there was no recrimination(反責)，no how could you do that to me? It was as though she really knew that we could not intentionally cause her pain, and while she did not understand, she forgave and curled up with her head on my daughter’s lap.

　　I suppose we could have concluded that she was just blindly loyal and docile. But eventually we knew better. She is entirely capable of disobedience, as she has proved many times. She will ignore us when there are more interesting things to look at, rebuke us when we are careless, bark into the twilight when she has urgent messages to send. But her patience with our failings and fickleness and her willingness to give us a second chance are a daily lesson in gratitude.

　　My friends who grew up with dogs tell me how when they were teenagers and trusted no one in the world, they could tell their dog all their secrets. It was the one friendwho would not gossip or betray, could provide in the middle of the night the soft,unbegrudging comfort and peace that adolescence conspires to disrupt. An age that is all about growth and risk needs some anchors and weights, a model of steadfastness when all else is in flux. Sometimes I think Twist’s devotion keeps my girls on a benevolent lash, one that hangs quietly at their side as they trot along but occasionally yanks them back to safety and solid ground.

　　We’ve weighed so many decisions so carefully in raising our daughters what school to sendthem to and what church to attend, when to give them cell phones and with what precautions. But whenit comes to what really shapes their character and binds our family, I never would have thought we would owe so much to its smallest member.

　　15. In the first paragraph, the author suggests that____.

　　[A]a person can either have a high IQ or a low EQ

　　[B]her professor brother cares too much about IQ

　　[C]we need examples of how to follow ones heart

　　[D]she prefers dogs that are clever and loyal

　　16. According to the passage, all the following are Twists characteristics EXCEPT____.

　　[A]resignation

　　[B]patience

　　[C]forgiveness

　　[D]tenacity

　　17. According to the context, the meaning of the word “square” is closest to____.

　　[A]fast

　　[B]blindly

　　[C]straight

　　[D]stubbornly

　　18. That Twists devotion keeps my girls on a benevolent leash means that____.

　　[A]Twist is capable of looking after the girls

　　[B]Twist and the girls havebecome friends

　　[C]Twist knows how to follow the girls

　　[D]Twists loyalty helps the girls grow up

　　19. What does the author try to express in the last paragraph?

　　[A]Difficulties in raising her children.

　　[B]Worries about what to buy for kids.

　　[C]Gratitude to Twist for her role.

　　[D]Concerns about schooling and religion.

　　Text C

　　Most West African lorries ate not in what one would call the first flush of youth, and I had learnt by bitter experience not to expect anything very much of them. But the lorry that arrived to take me up to the mountains was worse than anything I had seen before: it tottered on the borders of senile decay. It stood there on buckled wheels, wheezing and gasping with exhaustionfromhaving to climb up the gentle slope to the camp, and I consigned myself and my loads to it with some trepidation. The driver, who was a cheerful fellow, pointed out that he would require my assistance in two very necessary operations: first, I had to keep the hand brake pressed down when travelling downhill, for unless it was held thus almost level with the floor it sullenly refused to function. Secondly, I had to keep a stern eye on the clutch, a willful piece of mechanism that seized every chance to leap out of its socket with a noise like a strangling leopard. As it was obvious that not even a West African lorry driver could be successful in driving while crouched under the dashboard in a pre-natal position, I had to take over control of these instruments if I valued my life. So, while I ducked at intervals to put on the brake, amid the rich smell of burning rubber, our noble lorry jerked its way towards the mountains at a steady twenty miles per hour; sometimes, when a downward slope favored it, it threw caution to the winds and careered along in a madcap fashion at twenty-five.

　　For the first thirty miles the red earth road wound its way through the lowland forest, the giant trees standing in solid ranks alongside and their branches entwined in an archway of leaves above us. Flocks of hornbills flapped across the road, honking like the ghosts of ancient taxis, and on the banks, draped decoratively in the patches of sunlight, the agama lizards lay, blushing into sunset coloring with excitement and nodding their heads furiously. Slowly and almost imperceptibly the road started to climb upwards, looping its way in languid curves round the forested hills. In the back of the lorry the boys lifted up their voices in song:

　　Home again, home again, When shall I see ma home? When shall I see ma mammy? Ill never forget ma home . . .

　　The driver hummed the refrain softly to himself, glancing at me to see if I would object. To his surprise I joined in, and so while the lorry rolled onwards trailing a swirling tail of red dust behind it, the boys in the back maintained the chorus while the driver and I harmonized andsang complicated bits, and the driver played a staccatoaccompaniment on the horn.

　　Breaks in the forest became more frequent the higher we climbed, and presently a new type of undergrowth began to appear: massive tree-ferns standing in conspiratorial groups at the roadside on their thick, squat, and hairy trunks, the fronds of leaves sproutingfromthe tops like delicate green fountains. These ferns were the guardians of a new world, for suddenly, as though the hills had shrugged themselves free of cloak, the forest disappeared. It lay behind us in the valley, a thick pelt of green undulating away into the heat-shimmered distance, while above us the hillside rose majestically, covered in a coat of rippling, waist-high grass, bleached golden by the sun. The lorry crept higher and higher, the engine gasping and shuddering with this unaccustomed activity. I began to think that we should have to push the wretched thing up the last two or three hundred feet, but to everyones surprise we made it, and the lorry crept on to the brow of the hill, trembling with fatigue, spouting steamfromits radiator like a dying whale. We crawled to a standstill and the driver switched off the engine.

　　“We must wait small-time, engine get hot, he explained, pointing to the forequarters of the lorry, which were bynow completely invisible under a cloud of steam. Thankfully I descendedfromthe red-hot inside of the cab and strolled down to where the road dipped into the next valley. From this vantage point I could see the country we had travelled through and the country we were about to enter.

　　20. That it tottered on the borders of senile decay means that the lorry was_________.

　　[A]about to break down

　　[B]a very old vehicle

　　[C]unable to travel the distance

　　[D] a dangerous vehicle

　　21. Which of the following words in the first paragraph is used literally?

　　[A]Flush.

　　[B]Borders.

　　[C]Operations.

　　[D]Gasping.

　　22. We learnfromthe first paragraph that the author regards the inadequacies of the lorry as _________.

　　[A]inevitable and amusing

　　[B] dangerous and frightening

　　[C] novel and unexpected

　　[D]welcome and interesting

　　23. All the following words in the last but one paragraph describe the lorry as a human

　　EXCEPT .

　　[A]trembling

　　[B]spouting

　　[C]shuddering

　　[D]crept

　　24. We can inferfromthe passage that the author was ________.

　　[A]bored by the appearance of the grasslands ahead

　　[B]reluctant to do any walking in so hot a climate

　　[C]unfriendly towards the local driver and boys

　　[D]a little surprised to have to help drive the lorry

　　25. A suitable title for the passage would be _______.

　　[A]A journey that scared me

　　[B]A journey to remember

　　[C]The wild West African lorry

　　[D]A comic journey in West Africa

　　Text D

　　Have you ever noticed a certain similarity in public parks and back gardens in the cities of the West? A ubiquitous woodland mix of lawn grasses and trees has found its way throughout Europe and the United States, and it’s now spread to other cities around the world. As ecologist Peter Groffman has noted, its increasingly difficult to tell one suburb apartfromanother, even when theyre located in vastly different climates such as Phoenix, Arizona, or Boston in the much chillier north-east of the US. And why do parks in New Zealand often feature the same species of trees that grow on the other side of the world in the UK?

　　Inspired by the English and New England countrysides, early landscape architects of the 19th Century such as Andrew Jackson Downing and Frederick Law Olmstead created an aesthetic for urban public and private open space that persists to this day. But in the 21st Century, urban green space is tasked with doing far more than simply providing aesthetic appeal. From natural systems to deal with surface water run-off and pollution to green corridors to increasing interest in urban food production, the urban parks of the future will be designed and engineered for functionality as well as for beauty.

　　Imagine travelling among the cities of the mid-21st Century and finding a unique set of urban landscapes that capture local beauty, natural and cultural history, and the environmental context. They are tuned to their locality, and diverse within as well as across cities. There are patches that provide shade and cooling, places of local food production, and corridors that connect both residents and wildlife to the surrounding native environment. Their functions are measured and monitored to meet the unique needs of each city for food production, water use, nutrient recycling, and habitat. No two green spaces are quite the same.

　　Planners are already starting to work towards this vision. And if this movement has a buzzword it is “hyperfunctionality”--designs which provide multiple uses in a confined space, and a term coined by Richard Pouyat of the US Forest Service. At the moment, urban landscapes are highly managed and limited in their spatial extent. Even the "green" cities of the future will contain extensive areas of buildings, roads, railways, and other built structures. These future cities are likely to contain a higher proportion of green cover than the cities of today, with an increasing focus on planting on roofs, vertical walls, and formerly impervious surfaces like car parks. But built environments will still be ever-present in dense megacities. We can greatly enhance the utility of green space through designs that provide a range of different uses in a confined space. A hyperfunctional planting, for example, might be designed to provide food, shade, wildlife habitat, and pollution removal all in the same garden with the right choice of plants, configurations, and management practices.

　　What this means is that we have to maximise the benefits and uses of urban parks, while minimising the costs of building and maintaining them. Currently, green space and street plantings are relatively similar throughout the Western world, regardless of differences in local climate, geography, and natural history. Even desert cities feature the same sizable street trees and well-watered and well-fertilized lawns that you might see in more temperate climes. The movement to reduce the resources and water requirements of such urban landscapes in these arid areas is called "xeriscaping" a concept that has so-far received mixed responses in terms of public acceptance. Scott Yabiku and colleagues at the Central Arizona Phoenix project showed thatnewcomers to the desert embrace xeriscaping more than long-time residents, who are more likely to prefer the well-watered aesthetic. In part, this may be because xeriscaping is justified more by reducing landscaping costs in this case water costs than by providing desired benefits like recreation, pollution mitigation, and cultural value. From this perspective, xeriscaping can seem more likea compromise than an asset.

　　But there are other ways to make our parks and natural spaces do more. Nan Ellin, of the Ecological Planning Center in the US, advocates an asset-based approach to urbanism. Instead of envisioning cities in terms what they cant have, ecological planners are beginning to frame the discussion of future cities in terms of what they do have - their natural and cultural assets. In Utah’s Salt Lake City, instead of couching environmental planning as an issue of resource scarcity, the future park is described as "mountain urbanism" and the strong association of local residents with the natural environment of the mountain ranges near their home. From this starting point, the local climate, vegetation, patterns of rain and snowfall, and mountain topography are all deemed natural assets that create a new perspective whenit comes to creating urban green space. In Cairns, Australia, the local master plan embraces "tropical urbanism" that conveys a sense of place through landscaping features, while also providing important functions such as shading and cooling in this tropical climate.

　　The globally homogenized landscape aesthetic--which sees parksfromBoston to Brisbane looking worryingly similar--will diminish in importance as future urban green space will be attuned to local values and cultural perceptions of beauty. This will lead to a far greater diversity of urban landscape designs than are apparent today. Already, we are seeing new purposes for urban landscaping that are transforming the 20th century woodland park into bioswales--plantings designed to filter stormwater--green roofs, wildlife corridors, and urban food gardens. However, until recently we have been lacking the datasets and science-based specifications for designs that work to serve all of these purposes at once.

　　In New York City, Thomas Whitlow of Cornell University sends students through tree-lined streets with portable, backpack-mounted air quality monitors. At home in his laboratory, he places tree branches in wind tunnels to measure pollution deposition onto leaves. It turns out that currently, many street tree plantings are ineffective at removing air pollutants, and instead may trap pollutants near the ground. My students and I equipped street trees with sensors in and around the trunk in Los Angeles to monitor growth and water use in real time to help find which species provide the largest canopies for the lowest amount of water. Rather than relying on assumptions about the role of urban vegetation in improving the environment and health, future landscaping designs will be engineered based on empirical data and state of the art of simulations.

　　New datasets on the performance of urban landscapes are changing our view of what future urban parks will look like and what it will do. With precise measurements of pollutant uptake, water use, plant growth rates, and greenhouse gas emissions, we are better and better able to design landscapes that require less intensive management and are less costly, while providing more social and environmental uses.

　　26. According to the passage, which of the following serves as the BEST reason for the similarity in urban green space throughout the West?

　　[A] Climate.

　　[B] Geography.

　　[C] Functional purposes.

　　[D] Design principles.

　　27. The following are all features of future urban green space EXCEPT that_______.

　　[A] each city has its distinct style of urban green space

　　[B] urban landscape will focus more on cultural history

　　[C] urban green space will be designed to serve many uses

　　[D] more green cover will be seen on city roofs and walls

　　28. Why are some local residents opposed to "xeriscaping"?

　　[A] It cannot reduce water requirements.

　　[B] It has proved to be too costly.

　　[C] It is not suited for the local area.

　　[D] It does not have enough advantages.

　　29. According to the passage, if planners adopt an asset-based approach, they will probably_______.

　　[A] incorporate the areas natural and cultural heritage into their design

　　[B] make careful estimation of the areas natural resources before designing

　　[C] combine natural resources and practical functions in their design

　　[D] envision more purposes for urban landscaping in their design

　　30. According to the passage, future landscaping designs will rely more on_______.

　　[A] human assumptions

　　[B] field work

　　[C] scientific estimation

　　[D] laboratory work

　　Part Ⅲ GENERAL KNOWLEDGE

　　31. Which party is in power now in the UK?

　　[A] The Conservative Party.

　　[B] The Labour Party.

　　[C] The Liberal Democrats.

　　[D] The Scottish National Party.

　　32. Which of the following lakes does Canada share with the United States?

　　[A] Lake Winnipeg.

　　[B] The Great Slave Lake.

　　[C] The Great Bear Lake.

　　[D] The five Great Lakes.

　　33. U. S. senators serve for ____ years after they are elected.

　　[A] four

　　[B] six

　　[C] three

　　[D] two

　　34. Who were the natives of Australia before the arrival of the British settlers?

　　[A] The Eskimos.

　　[B] The Maori.

　　[C] The Indians.

　　[D] The Aborigines.

　　35. ____ is best known for the technique of dramatic monologue in his poems.

　　[A] Robert Browning

　　[B] W. B. Yeats

　　[C] William Blake

　　[D] William Wordsworth

　　36. Which of the following is a contemporary British poet?

　　[A] Ted Hughes.

　　[B] William Wordsworth.

　　[C] E. E. Cummings.

　　[D] Carl Sandburg.

　　37. Who was the author of Moby-Dick?

　　[A] Nathaniel Hawthorne.

　　[B] Ralph Waldo Emerson.

　　[C] Herman Melville.

　　[D] Washington Irving.

　　38. The words "tennis, badminton, golf, basketball and football" constitute a ____ field.

　　[A] semantic

　　[B] connotative

　　[C] conceptual

　　[D] collocative

　　39. A: Do you like ice cream? B: Yes, I do.

　　This is an example of ____.

　　[A] reference

　　[B] substitution

　　[C] conjunction

　　[D] ellipsis

　　40. Which of the following is a voiceless consonant?

　　[A] [ j ]

　　[B] [ w ]

　　[C] [ p ]

　　[D] [ l ]

　　PART IV PRROFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION

　　The passage contains TEN errors．Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In

　　each case, only ONE word is involved．You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the

　　following way：

　　For a wrong word， underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank

　　provided at theendof the line．

　　For a missing word． mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the

　　word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at theendof

　　the line．

　　For an unnecessary word， cross the unnecessary word with a slash”／”and put the word in the

　　blank provided at theendof the line．

　　EXAMPLE

　　When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit， (1) an

　　it never buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never

　　them on the wall．When a natural history museum

　　wants an exhibition, it must often build it． (3) exhibit

　　When I was in my early teens, I was taken to a spectacular show

　　on ice by the mother of a friend. Looked round at the luxury of the (1)

　　rink, my friend’s mother remarked on the “plush” seats we had been

　　given. I did not know what she meant, and being proud of my (2)

　　vocabulary, I tried to infer its meaningfromthe context. “Plush”

　　was clearly intended asa complimentary, a positive evaluation; that (3)

　　much I could tell itfromthe tone of voice and the context. So I (4)

　　started to use the word Yes, I replied, they certainly are plush, and

　　so are the ice rink and the costumes of the skaters, aren’t they? My

　　friend’s mother was very polite to correct me, but I could tellfromher (5)

　　expression that I had not got the word auite right.

　　Often we can indeed inferfromthe context what a word roughly

　　Neans, and that is in fact the way which we usually acquire both (6)

　　new words and new meanings for familiar words, specially in our (7)

　　own first language. But sometimes we need to ask, as I should have

　　asked for plush, and this is particularly true in the (8)

　　aspect of a foreign language. If you are continually surrounded by (9)

　　speakers of the language you are learning, you can ask them directly,

　　but often this opportunity does not exist for the learner of English.

　　So dictionaries have been developed to mendthe gap. (10)

　　PART V TRANSLATION

　　SECTION A CHINESES TO ENGLISH

　　茶花（camellia）的自然花期在12月至翌年4月，以紅色系為主，另有黃色系和白色系等，花色艷麗。本屆花展充分展示了茶花的品種資源和科研水平，是近三年來本市規(guī)模最大的一屆茶花展。為了使廣大植物愛好者有更多與茶花親密接觸的機會，本屆茶花展的布展范圍延伸至整個園區(qū)，為賞花游客帶來便利。

　　此次茶花展歷時2個月，展期內(nèi)200多個茶花品種將陸續(xù)亮相。

　　SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE

　　At its heart, psycholinguistic work consists of two questions. One is what knowledge of language is needed for us to use language? In a sense, we must know a language to use it, but we are not always fully aware of this knowledge. A distinction may be drawn between tacit knowledge and explicit knowledge. Tacit knowledge refers to the knowledge of how to perform various acts, whereas explicit knowledge refers to the knowledge of the processes or mechanisms used in these acts. We sometimes know how to do something without knowing how we do it. For instance, a baseball pitcher (投手) might know how to throw a baseball 90 miles an hour but might have little or no explicit knowledge of the muscle groups that are involved in this act. Similarly, we may distinguish between knowing how to speak and knowing what processes are involved in producing speech. Generally speaking, much of our linguistic knowledge is tacit rather than explicit.

　　PART VI WRITING

　　There has been a new trendin economic activity--the sharing economy. The biggest section of the sharing economy is travel. You can find a potential host through awebsite. If you both get along and they are available during your planned trip, you stand a chance of getting a place to stay for free. In addition, people also usewebsites and apps to rent out their cars, houses, tools, clothes and services to one another. Time magazine has included this trendin a list titled “10 ideas that will change the world”. It said: “In an era when families are scattered and we may not know the people down the streets, sharing things--even with strangers we’ve just met on line--allows us to make meaningful connections.” What do you think of Time’s comment?

　　My Views on the Sharing Economy

　　In the first part of your essay you should state clearly your main argument, and in the second part you should support your argument with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary.

　　Marks will be awarded for content, organization, language and appropriateness. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your essay on Answer Sheet Four.

　　答案

　　PartⅠListening Comprehension

　　Section A Mini-lecture

　　1. parts of language

　　2. other features

　　3. rhythm

　　4. having the ability

　　5. a particular subject

　　6. knowledge or experience

　　7. reinterpreting

　　8. predicting/making predictions

　　9. types of predictions

　　10. contents

　　Section B Interview

　　1-5 DCBAC

　　6-10 CADBB

　　PartⅡ Reading Comprehension

　　11-15 CDBAC

　　16-20 ACDCB

　　21-25 BCABD

　　26-30 DADAC

　　Part ⅢGeneral Knowledge

　　31-35 ADBDA

　　36-40 ACABC

　　Part ⅣProofreading & Error Correction

　　1. Looked→Looking

　　2. and→but

　　3. complimentary→compliment

　　4.it→去掉it

　　5. very→too

　　6.∧which→in

　　7. specially→especially或particularly

　　8. for→about

　　9. aspect→case

　　10. been→去掉been

　　Part ⅤTranslation

　　Section A Chinese to English

　　Camellia’s flowering period startsfromDecember andends in the next April，and the colors of the flowers are bright and showy with red in majority, yellow, white and other colors in minority. It’s the city’s largest camellia show in recent three years, which fully displays camellia’s various species as well as human’s scientific research level of it. In order to provide the majority of plant-lovers with more opportunities to closely appreciate the beauty of camellia, the area of the Camellia Show is extended to the whole garden so that it can bring more convenience for the visitors.

　　The Camellia Show takes over two months, in which more than 200 various camellias will be presented successively.

　　Section B English to Chinese

　　心理語言學的研究包括兩個核心問題。第一，我們使用語言需要什么語言知識？從某種意義上說，我們必須擁有某種語言的知識才能使用該語言，但卻并不總是能完全意識到這種知識。我們可能要對隱性知識和顯性知識加以區(qū)分。隱性知識是指如何執(zhí)行各種動作所擁有的知識，而顯性知識是指在這些動作中使用的過程或者機制所蘊含的知識。有時，我們知道如何做某事，卻無法說出我們是怎么做的.。比如，一名棒球投手可能知道如何以每小時90英里的速度把球拋出去，但對有關(guān)參與此活動的肌群的顯性知識卻知之甚少，或一無所知。同樣地，我們知道如何說話，但卻不清楚言語產(chǎn)生包含哪些過程�？偟膩碚f，我們的大多數(shù)語言知識都是隱性知識而非顯性知識。

　　Part ⅥWriting

　　參考范文

　　My Views on the Sharing Economy

　　The sharing economy refers to the economic pattern in which people share access to resources, such as goods, services and data. This newly emerging trendwould be impossible without the development of technology. It is the Internetthat makes the sharing cheaper and easier and helps to strike a balance between supply and demand. Time magazine has listed the sharing economy as one of the “10 ideas that will change the world”. As far asthe comment is concerned, I cannot agree with Time more.

　　As one of the greatest benefits of the digital age, the sharing economy arisesfromour oldest instinct as human beings. There is always an urge for us to connect with others, especially in an era when families are scattered and we do not really know the people who live nearby. It has been said that “Joys shared with others are more enjoyed.” However, in my eyes, the resources shared with others are more beneficial to our society.

　　On the one hand, sharing economy leads to a more efficient use of resources. Some items are expensive to buy but widely owned by people who do not make the best use of them. Occasional sharing may provide extraincome for the owners and can be less costly for the borrowers. If managed well, a win-win situation is achieved for both parties in the process. Besides, sharing economy contributes to environmental protection. Takeaccommodation for example. The more hotels are built, the more resources are required, which might in turn result in a decrease in arable land and public green space. On the other hand, the transaction cost is reduced due to the use of Internetand various apps. With a smart phone in your hand, it is not difficult to find a potential host in the neighboring area. People are meeting increasingly on screens,discussing onlineand purchasing goods domestic and overseas, paying through Internetpayment system.

　　To summarize, although the sharing economy is not perfect at present because of concerns in insurance, legal liability, safety and the like, I believe, quite firmly, that it represents the future trendand has the power to change the world for the convenience and flexibility it brings to us. Just as the old Chinese saying goes, the defects cannot obscure the virtues of a splendid jade, and I assume it also applies to the sharing economy.

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷5

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREttENSION (35 MIN)

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONCE ONLY While listening, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need themto complete a gap-filling task after the mini-lecture. When the lecture is over, you will be given two minutes to check your notes, and another ten minutesto complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE, using no more than three words in each gap. Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are) both grammatically and semantically acceptable. You may refer to your noteswhile completing the task. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. Now, listen to the mini-lecture. 　　 Observation Behaviour

　　People do observation in daily life context for safety or for proper behaviour. However, there are differences in daily life observation and research observation.

　　A. Differences

　　---- daily life observation

　　--casual

　　--(1) ________

　　--defendence on memory

　　---- research observation

　　-- (2) _________

　　-- careful record keeping

　　B. Ways to select samples in research

　　---- time sampling

　　-- systematic: e.g. fixed intervals every hour

　　-- random: fixed intervals but (3) _______

　　Systematic sampling and random sampling are often usedin combination.

　　---- (4) _______

　　-- definition: selection of different locations

　　-- reason: humans’ or animals’ behaviour (5) ______ across circumstances

　　-- (6) ______: more objective observations

　　C. Ways to record behaviour (7) _______

　　---- observation with intervention

　　-- participant observation: researcher as observer and participant

　　-- field experiment: research (8) ______ over conditions

　　---- observation without intervention

　　-- purpose: describing behaviour (9) ______

　　-- (10) ______ : no intervention

　　-- researcher: a passive recorder

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　In this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Questions 1 to 5 are based on an interview. At theendof the interview you will be given 10 seconds to answer each of the foliowing five questions. Now listen to the interview.

　　1. Which of the following statements about creativity is INCORRECT?

　　A. Creativity stemsfromhuman beings novel thinking.

　　B. The duration of the creative process variesfromperson to person.

　　C. Creative people focus on novel thinking rather than on solutions.

　　D. Theoutcome of humancreativity comes in varied forms.

　　2. The interviewee cites the Bach family to show that creativity

　　A. appears to be the result of the environment.

　　B. seems to be attributable togenetic makeup.

　　C. appears to be more associated with great people.

　　D. comesfromboth environment andgenetic makeup.

　　3. How many types of the creative process does the interviewee describe?

　　A. One. B. Two. C. Three. D. Four.

　　4. Which of the following features of a creative personality is NOT mentioned in the interview?

　　A. Unconventional. B. Original.

　　C. Resolute. D. Critical.

　　5. The interviewees suggestion for a creativity workout supports the view that

　　A. brain exercising will not make people creative.

　　B. most people have diversified interests and hobbies.

　　C. the environment is significant in the creative process.

　　D. creativity can only be found in great people.

　　SECTION C NEWS BROADCAST

　　In this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO. Question 6 is based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 10 seconds to answer the question. Now listen to the news.

　　6. What is the news item mainly about?

　　A. U.S. astronauts made three space walks.

　　B. An international space station was set up.

　　C. A problem in the cooling system was solved.

　　D. A 350-kilogram ammonia pump was removed.

　　Questions 7 and 8 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions. Now listen to the news.

　　7. In which country would parents often threaten to punish children by leaving them outside?

　　A. India. B. The Philippines.

　　C. Egypt. D. Not mentioned.

　　8. What is the main purpose of the study?

　　A. To reveal cultural differences and similarities.

　　B. To expose cases of child abuse and punishment.

　　C. To analyze child behaviour across countries.

　　D. To investigate ways of physical punishment.

　　Questions 9 and 10 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions. Now listen to the news.

　　9. According to the news item, Japans economic growth in the second quarter was ____ less than the first quarter.

　　A. 0.6 percent B. 3.4 percent

　　C. 4 percent D. 3 percent

　　10. How many reasons does the news item cite for Japans slow economic growth?

　　A. 2. B. 3. C. 4. D. 5.

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION (30 MIN)

　　In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of 20 multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　TEXT A

　　I used to look at my closet and see clothes. These days, whenever I cast my eyes upon the stacks of shoes and hangers of shirts, sweaters and jackets, I see water.

　　It takes 569 gallons to manufacture a T-shirt,fromits start in the cotton fields to its appearance on store shelves. A pair of running shoes? 1,247 gallons.

　　Until last fall, Id been oblivious to my "water footprint", which is defined as the total volume of freshwater that is used to produce goods and services, according to the Water Footprint Network. The Dutch nonprofit has been working to raise awareness of freshwater scarcity since2008, but it was through the "Green Blue Book" by Thomas M. Kostigen that I was able to see how my own actions factored in.

　　Ive installed gray-water systems to reuse the wastewaterfrommy laundry, machine and bathtub and reroute it to my landscape - systems that save, on average, 50 gallons of water per day. Ive set up rain barrels and infiltration pits to collect thousands of gallons of storm water cascadingfrommy roof. Ive even entered the last bastion of greendom -installinga composting toilet.

　　Suffice to say, Ive been feeling pretty satisfied with myself for all the drinking water Ive saved with these big-ticket projects.

　　Now I realize that my daily consumption choices could have an even larger effect –not only on the local water supply but also globally: 1.1 billion people have no access to freshwater, and, in the future, those who do have access will have less of it.

　　To see how much virtual water 1 was using, I logged on to the "Green Blue Book"websiteand used its water footprint calculator, entering my daily consumption habits. Tallying up the water footprint of my breakfast, lunch, dinner and snacks, as well as my daily dose of over-the-counter uppers and downers - coffee, wine and beer- Im using 512 gallons of virtual water each day just to feed myself.

　　In a word: alarming.

　　Even more alarming was how much hidden water I was using to get dressed. Im hardly a clotheshorse, but the few new items I buy once again trumped the amount of water flowingfrommy faucets each day. If Im serious about saving water, I realized I could make some simple lifestyle shifts. Looking more closely at the areas in my life that use the most virtual water, it was food and clothes, specifically meat, coffee and, oddly, blue jeans and leather jackets.

　　Being a motorcyclist, I own an unusually large amount of leather - boots and jackets in particular. All of it is enormously water intensive. It takes 7,996 gallons to make a leather.jacket, leather being a byproduct of beef. It takes 2,866 gallons of water to make a single pair of blue jeans, because theyre madefromwater-hogging cotton.

　　Crunching the numbers for the amount of clothes I buy every year, it looks a lot like my friends swimming pool. My entire closet is borderline Olympic.Gulp.

　　My late resolution is to buy some items used. Underwear and socks are, of course, exemptfromthis strategy, but 1 have no problem shopping less and also shopping at Goodwill. In fact, Id been doing that for the past year to save money. My clothes outrageous water footprint just reintbrced it for me.

　　More conscious living and substitution, rather than sacrifice, are the prevailing ideas with the water footprint. Its one Im trying, and thats had an unusual upside. I had a hamburger recently, and I enjoyed it a lot more since it is now an occasional treat rather than a weekly habit.(One gallon =3.8 litres)

　　11. According to the passage, the Water Footprint Network

　　A. made the author aware of freshwater shortage.

　　B. helped the author get to know the Green Blue Book.

　　C. worked for freshwater conservation for nonprofit purposes.

　　D. collaborated with the Green Blue Book in freshwater conservation.

　　12. Which of the following reasons can best explain the authors feeling of self-satisfaction?

　　A. He made contribution to drinking water conservation in his own way.

　　B. Money spent on upgrading his household facilities was worthwhile.

　　C. His house was equipped with advanced water-saving facilities.

　　D. He could have made even greater contribution by changing his lifestyle.

　　13. According to the context, "...how mv own actions factored in" means

　　A. how I could contribute to water conservation.

　　B. what efforts I should make to save fresh water.

　　C. what behaviour could be counted as freshwater-saving.

　　D. how much of what I did contributed to freshwater shortage.

　　14. According to the passage, the author was more alarmed by the fact that

　　A. he was having more meat and coffee.

　　B. his clothes used even more virtual water.

　　C. globally there will be less fresh water.

　　D. his lifestyle was too extravagant.

　　15. "My entire closet is borderline Olympic" is an example of

　　A. exaggeration. B. analogy.

　　C. understatement. D. euphemism.

　　16. What is the tone of the author in the last paragraph?

　　A. Sarcastic. B. Ironic. C. Critical. D. Humorous.

　　TEXT B

　　In her novel of "Reunion, American Style", Rona Jaffe suggests that a class reunion "is more than a sentimental journey. It is also a way of answering the question that lies at the back of nearly all our minds. Did they do better than I?"

　　Jaffes observation may be misplaced butnot completely lost. According to a study conducted by social psychologist Jack Sparacino, the overwhelming majority who attendreunions arent there invidiouslyto compare their recentaccomplishments with those of their former classmates. Instead, they hope, primarily, to relive their earlier successes.

　　Certainly, a few return to show their former classmates how well they have done; others enjoy observing the changes that have occurred in their classmates (not always in themselves, of course). But the majority who attendtheir class reunions do so to relive the good times they remember having when they were younger. In his study, Sparacino found that, as high school students, attendees had been more popular, more often regarded as attractive, and more involved in extracurricular activities than those classmates who chose not to attend. For those who turned up at their reunions, then, the old times were also the good times!

　　It would appear that Americans have a special fondness for reunions, judging by their prevalence. Major league baseball players, fraternity members, veterans groups, high school and college graduates, and former Boy Scouts all hold reunions on a regular basis. In addition, family reunions frequently attract blood relativesfromfaraway places who spendconsiderable money and time to reunite.

　　Actually, in their affection for reuniting with friends, family or colleagues, Americans are probably no differentfromany other people, except that Americans have created a mind-boggling number and variety of institutionalized forms of gatherings to facilitate the satisfaction of this desire. Indeed, reunions have increasinglybecome formal events thatare organized on a regular basis and, in the process, they have alsobecome big business.

　　Shell Norris of Class Reunion, Inc., says that Chicago alone has 1,500 high school reunions each year. A conservative estimate on the national level would be 10,000 annually. At one time, all high school reunionswere organized by volunteers, usually female homemakers. In the last few years, however, as more and more women have entered the labour force, alumni reunions are increasingly being planned byspecialized companies rather than by part-time volunteers.

　　The first college reunion was held by the alumni of Yale University in 1792. Graduates of Pennsylvania, Princeton, Stanford, and Brown followed suit. And by theendof the 19th century,

　　most 4-year institutions were holding alumni reunions.

　　The variety of college reunions is impressive. At Princeton, alumni parade through the town wearing their class uniforms and singing their alma mater. At Marietta College, they gather for a dinner-dance on a steamship cruising the Ohio River.

　　Clearly, the thought of cruising on a steamship or marching through the streets is usually not, by itself, sufficient reason for large numbers of alumni to return to campus. Alumni who decide to attendtheir reunions sharea common identity based on the years they spent together as undergraduates. For this reason, universities that somehow establisha common bond – for example, because they are relatively small or especially prestigious - tendto draw substantial numbers of their alumni to reunions. In an effort to enhancethis common identity, larger colleges and universities frequently build their class reunions on participation in smaller units, such as departments or schools. Or they encourage "affinity reunions" for groups of former cheerleaders, editors, fraternity members, musicians, members ofmilitary organizations on campus, and the like.

　　Of course, not every alumnus is fond of his or her alma mater. Students who graduated during the late 1960s may be especially reluctant to get involved in alumni events. They were part of the generation that conducted sit-ins and teach-ins directed at university administrators, protested military recruitment on campus and marched against "establishment politics." If this generation hasa common identity, it may fall outside of their university ties - or even be hostile to them. Even as they enter their middle years, alumni who continue to hold unpleasant memories of college during this period may not wish to attendclass reunions.

　　17. According to the passage, Sparacinos study

　　A. provided strong evidence for Jaffes statement.

　　B. showed that attendees tended to excel in high school study.

　　C. found that interest in reunions was linked with school experience.

　　D. found evidence for attendees intense desire for showing off success.

　　18. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as a distinct feature of U.S. class reunions?

　　A. U.S. class reunions are usually occasions to show off ones recent success.

　　B. Reunions are regular and formalevents organized by professional agencies.

　　C. Class reunions havebecome a profitable business.

　　D. Class reunions have brought about a variety of activities.

　　19. What mainly attracts many people to return to campus for reunion?

　　A. The variety of activities for class reunion.

　　B. The special status their university enjoys.

　　C. Shared experience beyond the campus.

　　D. Shared undergraduate experience on campus.

　　20. The rhetorical function of the first paragraph is to

　　A. introduce Rona Jeffes novel.

　　B. present the authors counterargument.

　　C. serve as prelude to the authors argument.

　　D. bring into focus contrasting opinions.

　　21. What is the passage mainly about?

　　A. Reasons for popularity and (non)attendance for alumni reunions.

　　B. A historical perspective for alumni reunions in the United States.

　　C. Alumni reunions and American university traditions.

　　D. Alumni reunion and its social and economic implications.

　　TEXT C

　　One time while on his walk George met Mr. Cattanzara coming home very latefromwork. He wondered if he was drunk but then could tell he wasnt. Mr. Cattanzara, a stocky, bald-headed man who worked in a change booth on an IRT station, lived on the next block after Georges, above a shoe repair store. Nights, during the hot weather, he sat on his stoop in an undershirt, reading the New York Times in the light of the shoemakers window. He read itfromthe first page to the last, then went up to sleep. And all the time he was reading the paper, his wife, a fat woman with a white face, leaned out of the window, gazing into the street, her thick white arms folded under her loose breast, on the window ledge.

　　Once in a while Mr. Cattanzara came home drunk, but it was a quiet drunk. He never made any trouble, only walked stiffly up the street and slowly climbed the stairs into the hall. Though drunk he looked the same as always, except for his tight walk, the quietness, and that his eyes were wet. George liked Mr. Cattanzara because he remembered him giving him nickels to buy lemon ice with when he was a squirt. Mr. Cattanzara was a different type than those in the neighbourhood. He asked different questions than the others when he met you, and he seemed to know what went on in all the newspapers. He read them, as his fat sick wife watchedfromthe window.

　　"What are you doing with yourself this summer, George?" Mr. Cattanzara asked. "l see you walkin around at night."

　　George felt embarrassed. "I like to walk."

　　"What are you doin in the day now?"

　　"Nothing much just now. Im waiting for a job." Since it shamed him to admit that he wasnt working, George said, "Im reading a lot to pick upmy education."

　　"What are you readin?"

　　George hesitated, then said, "I got a list of books in the library once and now Im gonna read them this summer." He felt strange and a little unhappy saying this, but he wanted Mr. Cattanzara to respect him.

　　"How many books are there on it?"

　　"I never counted them. Maybe around a hundred."

　　Mr. Cattanzara whistled through his teeth.

　　"I figure if l did that," George went on earnestly, "it would help me inmy education. 1 dont mean the kind they give you in high school. I want to know different things than they learn there, if you know what I mean."

　　The change maker nodded. "Still and all, one hundred books is a pretty big load for one

　　summer."

　　"It might take longer."

　　"After youre finished with some, maybe you and I can shoot the breeze about them?" said Mr. Cattanzara.

　　"When Im finished," George answered.

　　Mr. Cattanzara went home and George continued on his walk. After that, though he had the urge to, George did nothing differentfromusual. He still took his walks at night,ending up in the little park. But one evening the shoemaker on the next block stopped George to say he was a good boy, and George figured that Mr. Cattanzara had told him all about the books he was reading. From the shoemaker it must have gone down the street, because George saw a couple of people smiling kindly at him, though nobody spoke to him personally. He felt a little better around the neighbourhood and liked it more, though not so much he would want to live in it forever. He had never exactly disliked the people in it, yet he had never liked them very much either. It was the fault of the neighbourhood. To his surprise, George found out that his father and his sister Sophie knew about his reading too. His father was too shy to say anything about it - he was never much of a talker in his whole life -- but Sophie was softer to George, and she showed him in other ways she was proud of him.

　　22. In the excerpt, Mr. Cattanzara was described as a man who

　　A. was fond of drinking. B. showed a wide interest.

　　C. often worked overtime. D. liked to gossip after work.

　　23. It can be inferredfromthe passage that

　　A. Mr. Cattanzara was surprised at Georges reading plan.

　　B. Mr. Cannazara was doubtful about George throughout.

　　C. George was forced to tell a lie and then regretted.

　　D. George lied at the beginning and then became serious.

　　24. After the street conversation with Mr. Cattanzara, George

　　A. remained the same as usual.

　　B. became more friendly with Mr. Cattanzara.

　　C. began to like his neighbours more than ever.

　　D. continued to read the booksfromthe list.

　　25. We can tellfromthe excerpt that George

　　A. had a neither close nor distant relationship with his father.

　　B. was dissatisfied with his life and surroundings.

　　C. found that his sister remained skeptical about him.

　　D. found his neighbours liked to poke their nose into him.

　　TEXT D

　　Abraham Lincoln turns 200 this year, and hes beginning to show his age. When his birthday arrives, on February 12, Congress will hold a special joint session in the Capitols National Statuary Hall, a wreath will be laid at the great memorial in Washington, and a webcast will link school classrooms for a "teach-in" honouring his memory.

　　Admirable as they are, though, the events will strike many of us Lincoln fans as inadequate, even halfhearted -- and another sign that our appreciation for the 16th president and his towering achievements is slipping away. And you dont have to be a Lincoln enthusiast to believe that this is something we cant afford to lose.

　　Compare this years celebration with the Lincoln centennial, in 1909. That year, Lincolns likeness made its debut on the penny, thanks to approvalfromthe U.S. Secretary of the Treasury. Communities and civic associations inevery comer of the country erupted in parades, concerts, balls, lectures, and military displays. We still feel the effects today: The momentum unloosed in 1909 led to the Lincoln Memorial, opened in 1922, and the Lincoln Highway, the first paved transcontinental thoroughfare.

　　The celebrants in 1909 had a few inspirations we lack today. Lincolns presidency was still a living memory for countless Americans. In2009we are farther in timefromtheendof the Second World War than they werefromthe Civil War; families still felt the loss of loved onesfromthat awful national trauma.

　　But Americans in 1909 had something more: an unembarrassed appreciation for heroes and an acute sense of the way that even long-dead historical figures press in on the present and make us who we are.

　　One story will illustrate what lm talking about.

　　In2003a group of local citizens arranged to place a statue of Lincoln in Richmond, Virginia, former capital of the Confederacy. The idea touched off a firestorm of controversy. The Sons of Confederate Veterans held a public conference of carefully selected scholars to "reassess" the legacy of Lincoln. The verdict - no surprise - was negative: Lincoln was labeled everythingfroma racist totalitarian to a teller of dirty jokes.

　　I covered the conference as a reporter, but what really unnerved me was a counter-conference of scholars to refute the earlier one. These scholars drew a picture of Lincoln that only our touchy-feely age could conjure up. The man who oversaw the most savage war in our history was described - by his admirers, remember - as "nonjudgmental," "unmoralistic," "comfortable with ambiguity."

　　I felt the way a friendof mine felt as we later watched the unveiling of the Richmond statue in a subdued ceremony: "But hes so small!"

　　The statue in Richmond was indeed small; like nearly every Lincoln statue put up in the past half century, it was life-size and was placed at ground level, a conscious rejection of the heroic - approachable and human, yes, but not something to look up to.

　　The Richmond episode taught me that Americans have lost the language to explain Lincolns greatness even to ourselves. Earlier generations said they wanted their children to be like Lincoln: principled, kind, compassionate, resolute. Today we want Lincoln to be like us.

　　This helps to explain the long string of recent books in which writers have presented a Lincoln made after their own image. Weve had Lincoln as humorist and Lincoln as manic-depressive, Lincoln the business sage, the conservative Lincoln and the liberal Lincoln, the emancipator and the racist, the stoic philosopher, the Christian, the atheist - Lincoln over easy and Lincoln scrambled.

　　Whats often missing,,though, i, s the timeless Lincoln, the Lincoln whom all generations, our own no less than that of 1909, can lay claim to. Lucky for us, those memorializersfroma century ago - and, through them, Lincoln himself- have left us a hin, t of where to find him. The Lincoln Memorial is the mos, , tvisited of our presidential monuments. Here is where we find the Lincoln whoendures: in the words he left us, defining the country weve inherited. Here is the Lincoln who can beendlessly renewed and who, 200 years after his birth, retains the power to renew us.

　　26. The author thinks that this years celebration is inadequate and even halfhearted because

　　A. no Lincoln statue will be unveiled.

　　B. no memorial coins will be issued.

　　C. no similar appreciation of Lincoln will be seen.

　　D. no activities canbe compared to those in 1909.

　　27. According to the passage, what really makes the 1909 celebrations differentfromthis years?

　　A. Respect for great people and their influence.

　　B. Variety and magnitude of celebration activities.

　　C. Structures constructed in memory of Lincoln.

　　D. Temporal proximity to Lincolns presidency.

　　28. In the authors opinion, the counter-conference

　　A. rectified the judgment by those carefully selected scholars.

　　B. offered a brand new reassessment perspective.

　　C. came up with somewhat favourable conclusions.

　　D. resulted in similar disparaging remarks on Lincoln.

　　29. According to the author, the image of Lincoln conceived by contemporary people

　　A. conforms to traditional images.

　　B. reflects the present-day tendency of worship.

　　C. shows the present-day desire to emulate Lincoln.

　　D. reveals the variety of current opinions on heroes.

　　30. Which of the following best explains the implication of the last paragraph?

　　A. Lincolns greatness remains despite the passage of time.

　　B. The memorial is symbolic of the great mans achievements.

　　C. Each generation has it own interpretation of Lincoln.

　　D. People get to know Lincoln through memorializers.

　　PART III GENERAL KNOWLEDGE (10 MIN)

　　There are ten multiple-choice questions in this section. Mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　31. The Maori people are natives of

　　A. Australia. B. Canada. C. Ireland. D. New Zealand.

　　32. The British monarch is the Head of

　　A. Parliament. B. State. C. Government. D. Cabinet.

　　33. Americans celebrate Independence Day on

　　A. July 4th. B. October 11th. C. May 31st. D. September 6th.

　　34. Canada is bounded on the north by

　　A. the Pacific Ocean. B. the Atlantic Ocean.

　　C. the Arctic Ocean. D. the Great Lakes.

　　35. Who is the author of The Waste Lana?

　　A. George Bernard Shaw. B. W.B. Yeats.

　　C. Dylan Thomas. D. T.S. Eliot.

　　36. Which of the following novelists wrote The Sound and the Fury?

　　A. William Faulkner. B. Ernest Hemingway.

　　C. Scott Fitzgerald. D. John Steinbeck.

　　37. "The lettuce was lonely without tomatoes and cucumbersfor company" is an example of

　　A. exaggeration. B. understatement.

　　C. personification. D. synecdoche.

　　38. In English ifa word begins with a [l] or a [r], then the next sound must be a vowel. This is a (n)

　　A. assimilation rule. B. sequential rule. C.deletion rule. D. grammar rule.

　　39. Which of the following is an example of clipping?

　　A.APEC. B.Motel. C.Xerox. D.Disco.

　　40. The type of language which is selected as appropriate to a particular type of" situation is called

　　A. register. B. dialect. C. slang. D. variety

　　PART IV PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION (15 MIN)

　　The passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the following way:

　　For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank

　　provided at theendof the line.

　　For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "L" sign and write the

　　word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at theendof the

　　line.

　　For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the

　　blank provided at theendof the line.

　　EXAMPLE

　　When A art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an

　　it never buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never

　　them on the wall. When a natural history museum

　　wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3) exhibit

　　Proofread the given passage on ANSWER SHEET TWO as instructed.

　　The central problem of translating has always been whether to translate literally or freely. The argument has been going since at least the first (1) ______

　　century B.C. Up to the beginning of the 19th century, many writers

　　favoured certain kind of “free” translation: the spirit, not the letter; the (2) _______

　　sense not the word; the message rather the form; the matter not (3) _______

　　the manner. This is the often revolutionary slogan of writers who (4) _______

　　wanted the truth to be read and understood. Then in the turn of 19th (5) _______

　　century, when the study of cultural anthropology suggested that

　　the linguistic barriers were insuperable and that the language (6) _______

　　was entirely the product of culture, the view translation was impossible (7) _______

　　gained some currency, and with it that, if was attempted at all, it must be as (8) _______

　　literal as possible. This view culminated the statement of the (9) _______

　　extreme “l(fā)iteralists” Walter Benjamin and Vladimir Nobokov.

　　The argument was theoretical: the purpose of the translation, the

　　nature of the readership, the type of the text, was not discussed. Too

　　often, writer, translator and reader were implicitly identified with

　　each other. Now, the context has changed, and the basic problem remains. (10) _____

　　PART V TRANSLATION (60 MIN)

　　SECTION A CHINESE TO ENGLISH

　　Translate the underlined part of the following text into English. Write your translation on

　　ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　泊珍到偏遠小鎮(zhèn)的育幼院把生在那里養(yǎng)到1歲的孩子接回來。但泊珍看他第一眼，仿似一聲雷劈頭而來。令她暈頭脹腦，這l歲的孩子臉型長得如此熟悉，她心里的第一道聲音是，不能帶回去!

　　痛苦糾聚心中，眉心發(fā)燙發(fā)熱，胸口郁悶難展，胃里一股氣沖喉而上。院長說這孩子發(fā)育遲緩時，她更是心頭無緒。她在孩子所待的房里來回踱步，這房里還有其他小孩。整個房間只有一扇窗，窗外樹影婆娑。就讓孩子留下來吧，這里有善心的神父和修女，這里將來會擴充為有醫(yī)療作用的看護中心，這是留住孩子最好的地方。這孩子是她的秘密，她將秘密留在這樹林掩映的建筑罩。

　　她將秘密留在心頭。

　　SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE

　　Translate the underlined part of the following text into Chinese Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　In some cases, intelligent people implementing intelligent policies are responsible for producing a "boomerang effect"; they actually create more of whatever it is they seek to reduce in the first place.

　　The boomerang effect has been achieved many times in recent years by men and women of goodwill. State legislatures around the nation have recently raised the drinking age back to 21 in an effort to reduce the prevalence of violent deaths among our young people. But such policies seem instead to have created the conditions for even more campus violence. Some college students who previously drank in bars and lounges under the watchful supervision of bouncers (夜總會,酒吧等保安人員) (not to mention owners ea~er to keep their liquor licenses) now retreat to the sanctuary of their fraternity houses and apartments, where they no longer control their behaviour - or their drinking.

　　The boomerang effect has also played a role in attempts to reduce the availability of illicit drugs. During recent years, the federal government has been quite successful in reducing the supply of street drugs. As fields are burned and contraband (違禁品)confiscated, the price of street drugs has skyrocketed to a point where cheap altematives have begunto compete in the marketplace. Unfortunately, the cheap alternatives are even more harmful than the illicit drugs they replace.

　　boomerang: a curved flat piece of wood that can be thrown so as to retum to the thrower( 回飛鏢)

　　PART VI WRITING (45 MIN)

　　A recent survey of 2,000 college students asked about their attitudes towards phone calls and text-messaging (also known as Short Message Service) and found the students main goal was to pass along information in as little time, with as little small talk, as possible. "What they like most about their mobile devices is that they can reach other people," says Naomi Baron, a professor of linguistics at American University in Washington, D.C., who conducted the survey. "What they like least is that other people can reach them." How far do you agree with Professor Baron?

　　In the first part of your essay you should state clearly your main argument, and in the second part you should support your argument with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary.

　　You should supply an appropriate title for your essay.

　　Marks will be awarded for content, organization, language and appropriateness. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your essay on ANSWER SHEET FOUR.

　　聽力部分

　　1. rarely formal records

　　2. systematic objective manner

　　3. variable

　　4. situation sampling

　　5. varies

　　6. advantage

　　7. as it occurs

　　8. has more control

　　9. in natural setting

　　10. method

　　閱讀部分

　　TEXT A

　　11. C. worked for freshwater conservation for nonprofit purposes.

　　12. C. His house was equipped with advanced water-saving facilities.

　　13. A. how I could contribute to water conversation.

　　14. D. his lifestyle was too extravagant.

　　15. A. exaggeration.

　　16.D. Humorous.

　　TEXT B

　　17. C. found that interest in reunions was linked with school experience.

　　18. A. U.S. class reunions are usually occasions to show off ones recent success.

　　19. D. Shared undergraduate experience on campus.

　　20. D. bring into focus contrasting opinions.

　　21. A. Reasons for popularity and (non)attendance for alumni reunions.

　　TEXT C

　　22. B. showed a wide interest.

　　23. A. Mr. Cattanzara was surprised at Georges reading plan.

　　24. A. remained the same as usual.

　　25. B. was dissatisfied with his life and surroundings.

　　TEXT D

　　26. D. no activities canbe compared to those in 1909.

　　27. B. Variety and magnitude of celebration activities.

　　28. D. resulted in similar disparaging remarks on Lincoln.

　　29. D. reveals the variety of current opinions on heroes.

　　30. A. Lincolns greatness remains despite the passage of time.

　　人文知識

　　The indigenous people of New Zealand are the Maori.

　　31. D. N ew Zealand

　　32. B. state

　　33. A. July 4th

　　34. C. the Arctic Ocean

　　35. D. T.S.Eliot

　　36. A. William Faulkner

　　37. C. personification

　　38. B. sequential rule

　　39. D. Disco

　　40. A. register

　　改錯部分

　　1. going 后加 on

　　2. cerain 改成 some

　　3. rather 后加 than

　　4. is 改為 was

　　5. in 改為 at

　　6. 去掉 the

　　7. view 后加 that

　　8. 刪掉 was

　　9. statement 改為 statements

　　10.and 改為 but

　　翻譯部分

　　漢譯英

　　Tortured by the pains gathering in her heart, she felt something was burning between her eyebrows. Her chest was brimmed with depression which was likely to run out of her throat at any moment. She could not think clearly any longer when the headmaster told her that the child sufferedfromdevelopmental retardation. She strode up and down in the room where her child stayed with other pals. There was only one window in the room, out of which some shady trees were whispering. “Just leave it here”, she told herself, “This is the best choice by far, for there are kind priests and nuns in this place which may also be renovated into a Medicare center”. The child was her secret which would be kept in the buildings behind the woods.

　　英譯漢

　　然而上述政策反而引發(fā)了更多的校園暴力。一些大學生先前在夜總會的酒吧買醉，處于保安人員嚴密的監(jiān)控之下(酒吧老板們?yōu)榱吮Ｗ∽约嘿u酒的牌照也不會允許過激的事情發(fā)生)。現(xiàn)在，大學生們躲到他們互助會會所和公寓中酗酒,對自己飲酒的數(shù)量或行為都不再控制。政府在打擊非法毒品方面采取的措施同樣適得其反。近年來,聯(lián)邦政府已經(jīng)有效地抑制了街頭毒品買賣。警方搗毀了很多毒品種植地，沒收了違禁品，導致毒品的.價格暴漲，那些便宜的替代品因此也有了競爭力。糟糕的是，那些便宜的替換品帶來的危害甚至比他們所替代的毒品更大。

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷6

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION (35 MIN)

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need themto complete a gap-filling task after the mini-lecture. When the lecture is over, you will be given two minutes to check your notes, and another ten minutesto complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE. Use the blank sheet for note-taking.

　　Complete the gap-filling task. Some of the gaps below may require a maximum of THREE words. Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are) both grammatically & semantically acceptable. You may refer to your notes.

　　Paralinguistic Features of Language

　　Inface-to-face communication speakers often alter their tomes of voice or change their physical postures in order to convey messages. These means are called paralinguistic features of language, which fall into two categories.

　　First category: vocal paralinguistic features

　　(1)__________: to express attitude or intention (1)__________

　　Examples

　　1. whispering: need for secrecy

　　2. breathiness: deep emotion

　　3. (2)_________: unimportance (2)__________

　　4. nasality: anxiety

　　5. extra lip-rounding: greater intimacy

　　Second category: physical paralinguistic features

　　facial expressions

　　(3)_______ (3)__________

　　----- smiling: signal of pleasure orwelcome

　　less common expressions

　　----- eye brow raising: surprise or interest

　　----- lip biting: (4)________ (4)_________

　　gesture

　　gestures are related to culture.

　　British culture

　　----- shrugging shoulders: (5) ________ (5)__________

　　----- scratching head: puzzlement

　　other cultures

　　----- placing hand upon heart:(6)_______ (6)__________

　　----- pointing at nose: secret

　　proximity, posture and echoing

　　proximity: physical distance between speakers

　　----- closeness: intimacy or threat

　　----- (7)_______: formality or absence of interest (7)_________

　　Proximity is person-, culture- and (8)________ -specific. (8)_________

　　posture

　　----- hunched shoulders or a hanging head: to indicate(9)_____ (9)________

　　----- direct level eye contact: to express an open or challenging attitude

　　echoing

　　----- definition: imitation of similar posture

　　----- (10)______: aidin communication (10)___________

　　----- conscious imitation: mockery

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　In this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　Questions 1 to 5 are based on an interview. At theendof the interview you will be given 10 seconds to answer each of the following five questions.

　　Now listen to the interview.

　　1. According to Dr Johnson,diversitymeans

　　A. merging of different cultural identities.

　　B. more emphasis on homogeneity.

　　C. embracing of more ethnic differences.

　　D. acceptance of more branches of Christianity.

　　2. According to the interview, which of the following statements in CORRECT?

　　A. Some places are more diverse than others.

　　B. Towns are less diverse than large cities.

　　C. Diversity can be seen everywhere.

　　D. American is a truly diverse country.

　　3. According to Dr Johnson, which place will witness a radical change in its racial makeup by2025?

　　A. Maine

　　B. Selinsgrove

　　C. Philadelphia

　　D. California

　　4. During the interview Dr Johnson indicates that

　　A. greater racial diversity exists among younger populations.

　　B. both older and younger populations are racially diverse.

　　C. age diversity could lead to pension problems.

　　D. older populations are more racially diverse.

　　5. According to the interview, religious diversity

　　A. was most evident between 1990 and2000.

　　B. exists among Muslim immigrants.

　　C. is restricted to certain places in the US.

　　D. is spreading to more parts of the country.

　　SECTION C NEWS BROADCAST

　　In this section you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct answer to each question on your coloured answer sheet.

　　Question 6 is based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 10 seconds to answer the question.

　　Now listen to the news.

　　6. What is the main idea of the news item?

　　A. Sony developeda computer chip for cell phones.

　　B. Japan will market its wallet phone abroad.

　　C. The wallet phone is one of the wireless innovations.

　　D. Reader devices are available at stores and stations.

　　Question 7 and 8 is based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the questions.

　　Now listen to the news.

　　7. Which of the following is mentioned as the government’s measure to control inflation?

　　A. Foreign investment.

　　B. Donor support.

　　C. Price control.

　　D. Bank prediction.

　　8. According to Kingdom Bank, what is the current inflation rate in Zimbabwe?

　　A. 20 million percent.

　　B. 2.2 million percent.

　　C. 11.2 million percent.

　　D. Over 11.2 million percent.

　　Question 9 and 10 are based on the following news. At theendof the news item, you will be given 20 seconds to answer the question.

　　Now listen to the news.

　　9. Which of the following is CORRECT?

　　A. A big fire erupted on the Nile River.

　　B. Helicopters were used to evacuate people.

　　C. Five people were taken to hospital for burns.

　　D. A big fire took place on two floors.

　　10. The likely cause of the big fire is

　　A. electrical short-cut.

　　B. lack of fire-satefy measures.

　　C. terrorism.

　　D. not known.

　　PART IIREADING COMPREHENSION (30 MIN)

　　In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of 20 multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your coloured answer sheet.

　　TEXT A

　　Still, the image of any city has a half-life of many years. (So doesits name, officially changed in2001fromCalcutta to Kolkata, which is closer to what the word sounds like in Bengali. Conversing in English, I never heard anyone call the city anything but Calcutta.) To Westerners, the conveyance most identified with Kolkata is not its modern subway—a facility whose spacious stations have art on the walls and cricket matches on television monitors—but the hand-pulled rickshaw. Stories and films celebrate a primitive-looking cart with high wooden wheels, pulled by someone who looks close to needing the succor of Mother Teresa. For years the government has been talking about eliminating hand-pulled rickshaws on what it calls humanitarian grounds—principally on the ground that, as the mayor of Kolkata has often said, it is offensive to see “one man sweating and straining to pull another man.” But these days politicians also lament the impact of 6,000 hand-pulled rickshaws on a modern city’s traffic and, particularly, on its image. “Westerners try to associate beggars and these rickshaws with the Calcutta landscape, but this is not what Calcutta stands for,” the chief minister of West Bengal, Buddhadeb Bhattacharjee, said in a press conference in2006. “Our city stands for prosperity and development.” The chief minister—the equivalent of a state governor—went on to announce that hand-pulled rickshaws soon would be bannedfromthe streets of Kolkata.

　　Rickshaws are not there to haul around tourists. (Actually, I saw almost no tourists in Kolkata, apartfromthe young backpackers on Sudder Street, in what used to be a red-light district and is now said to be the single place in the city where the services a rickshaw puller offers may include providingfemale company to a gentleman for the evening.) It’s the people in the lanes who most regularly use rickshaws—not the poor but people who are just a notch above the poor. They are people who tendto travel short distances, through lanes that are sometimes inaccessible to even the most daring taxi driver. An older woman with marketing to do, for instance, can arrive in a rickshaw, have the rickshaw puller wait untilshe comes backfromvarious stalls to load her purchases, and then be taken home. People in the lanes use rickshaws as a 24-hour ambulance service. Proprietors of cafés or corner stores sendrickshaws to collect their supplies. (One morning I saw a rickshaw puller take on a load of live chickens—tied in pairs by the feet so they could be draped over the shafts and the folded back canopy and even the axle. By the time he trotted off, he was carrying about a hundred upside-down chickens.) The rickshaw pullers told me their steadiest customers are schoolchildren. Middle-class families contract with a puller to take a child to school and pick him up; the puller essentiallybecomes a family retainer.

　　From June to September Kolkata can get torrential rains, and its drainage system doesn’t need torrential rain to begin backing up. Residents who favor a touch of hyperbole say that in Kolkata “if a stray cat pees, there’s a flood.” During my stay it once rained for about 48 hours. Entire neighborhoods couldn’t be reached by motorized vehicles, and the newspapers showed pictures of rickshaws being pulled through water that was up to the pullers’ waists. When it’s raining, the normal customer base for rickshaw pullers expands greatly, as does the price of a journey. A writer in Kolkata told me, “When it rains, even the governor takes rickshaws.”

　　While I was in Kolkata, a magazine called India Today published its annual ranking of Indian states, according to such measurements as prosperity and infrastructure. Among India’s 20 largest states, Bihar finished dead last, as it has for four of the past five years. Bihar, a couple hundred miles north of Kolkata, is where the vast majority of rickshawpullers comefrom. Once in Kolkata, they sleep on the street or in their rickshaws or in a dera—a combination garage and repair shop and dormitory managed by someone called a sardar. For sleeping privileges in a dera, pullers pay 100 rupees (about $2.50) a month, which sounds like a pretty good deal until you’vevisited a dera. They gross between 100 and 150 rupees a day, out of which they have to pay 20 rupees for the use of the rickshaw and an occasional 75 or more for a payoff if a policeman stops them for, say, crossing a street where rickshaws are prohibited. A2003study found that rickshaw pullers are near the bottom of Kolkata occupations inincome, doing better than only the ragpickers and the beggars. For someone without landor education, that still beats trying to make a living in Bihar.

　　There are people in Kolkata,particularly educated and politically aware people, who will not ride in a rickshaw, because they are offended by the idea of being pulled by another human being or because they consider it not the sort of thing people of their station do or because they regard the hand-pulled rickshaw as a relic of colonialism. Ironically, some of those people are not enthusiastic about banning rickshaws. The editor of the editorial pages of Kolkata’s Telegraph—Rudrangshu Mukherjee, a former academic who still writes history books—told me, for instance, that he sees humanitarian considerationsas coming down on the side of keeping hand-pulled rickshaws on the road. “I refuse to be carried by another human being myself,” he said, “but I question whether we have the right to take away their livelihood.” Rickshaw supporters point out that whenit comes to demeaning occupations, rickshaw pullers are hardly unique in Kolkata.

　　When I asked one rickshaw puller if he thought the government’s plan to rid the city of rickshaws was based on a genuine interest in his welfare, he smiled, with a quick shake of his head—a gesture I interpreted to mean, “If you are so naive as to ask such a question, I will answer it, but it is not worth wasting words on.” Some rickshaw pullers I met were resigned to the imminentendof their livelihood and pin their hopes on being offered something in its place. As migrant workers, they don’t have the political clout enjoyed by, say, Kolkata’s sidewalk hawkers, who, after supposedly being scaled back at the beginning of the modernization drive, still clog the sidewalks, selling absolutely everything—or, as I found during the 48 hours of rain, absolutely everything but umbrellas. “The government was the government of the poor people,” one sardar told me. “Now they shake hands with the capitalists and try to get rid of poor people.”

　　But others in Kolkata believe that rickshaws will simply be confined more strictly to certain neighborhoods, out of the view of World Bank traffic consultants and California investment delegations—or that they will be allowed to die out naturally as they’re supplanted by more modern conveyances. Buddhadeb Bhattacharjee, after all, is not the first high West Bengal official to say that rickshaws would be off the streets of Kolkata in a matter of months. Similar statements have been made as far back as 1976. The ban decreed by Bhattacharjee has been delayed by a court case and by a widely held belief that some retraining or social security settlement ought to be offered to rickshaw drivers. It may also have been delayed by a quiet reluctance to give up something that has been part of the fabric of the city for more than a century. Kolkata, a resident told me, “has difficulty letting go.” One day a city official handed me a reportfromthe municipal government laying out options for how rickshaw pullers might be rehabilitated.

　　“Which option has been chosen?” I asked, noting that the report was dated almost exactly a year before my visit.

　　“That hasn’t been decided,” he said.

　　“When will it be decided?”

　　“That hasn’t been decided,” he said.

　　11. According to the passage, rickshaws are used in Kolkata mainly for the following EXCEPT

　　A. taking foreign tourists around the city.

　　B. providing transport to school children.

　　C. carrying store supplies and purchases

　　D. carrying people over short distances.

　　12. Which of the following statements best describes the rickshaw pullersfromBihar?

　　A. They comefroma relatively poor area.

　　B. They are provided with decentaccommodation.

　　C. Their living standards are very low in Kolkata.

　　D. They are often caught by policemen in the streets.

　　13. That “For someone without landor education, that still beats trying to make a living in Bihar” (4 paragraph) means that even so,

　　A. the poor prefer to work and live in Bihar.

　　B. the poorfromBihar fare better than back home.

　　C. the poor never try to make a living in Bihar.

　　D. the poor never seem to resent their life in Kolkata.

　　14. We can inferfromthe passage thatsome educated and politically aware people

　　A. hold mixed feelings towards rickshaws.

　　B. strongly support the ban on rickshaws.

　　C. call for humanitarian actions fro rickshaw pullers.

　　D. keep quiet on the issue of banning rickshaws.

　　15. Which of the following statements conveys the author’s sense of humor?

　　A. “…not the poor but people who are just a notch above the poor.” (2 paragraph)

　　B. “…,.which sounds like a pretty good deal until you’vevisited a dera.” (4 paragraph)

　　C. Kolkata, a resident told me, “ has difficulty letting go.” (7 paragraph).

　　D.“…or, as I found during the 48 hours of rain, absolutely everything but umbrellas.” (6 paragraph)

　　16. The dialogue between the author and the city official at theendof the passage seems to suggest

　　A. the uncertainty of the court’s decision.

　　B. the inefficiency of the municipal government.

　　C. the difficulty of finding a good solution.

　　D. the slowness in processing options.

　　TEXT B

　　Depending on whom you believe, the average American will, over a lifetime, wait in lines for two years (says National Public Radio) or five years (according to customer-loyalty experts).

　　The crucial word is average, as wealthy Americans routinely avoid lines altogether. Once the most democratic of institutions, lines are rapidlybecoming the exclusive province of suckers(people who still believe in and practice waiting in lines). Poor suckers, mostly.

　　Airports resemble France before the Revolution: first-class passengers enjoy "élite" security lines and priority boarding, and disembark before the unwashed in coach, held at bay by a flight attendant, are allowed to foul the Jetway.

　　At amusement parks, too, you can now buy your way out of line. This summer I haplessly watched kids use a $52 Gold Flash Pass to jump the lines at Six Flags New England, and similar systems are in use in most major American theme parks,fromUniversal Orlando to Walt Disney World, where the haves get to watch the have-mores breeze past on their way to their seats.

　　Flash Pass teaches children a valuable lesson in real-world economics: that the rich are more important than you, especially whenit comes to waiting. An NBA player once said to me, with a bemused chuckle of disbelief, that when playing in Canada--get this--"we have to wait in the same customs line as everybody else."

　　Almost every line can be breached for a price. In several U.S. cities this summer, early arrivers among the early adopters waiting to buy iPhones offered to sell their spots in the lines. On Craigslist, prospective iPhone purchasers offered to pay "waiters" or "placeholders" to wait in line for them outside Apple stores.

　　Inevitably, some semi-populist politicians have seen the value of sort-of waiting in lines with the ordinary people. This summer Philadelphia mayor John Street waited outside an AT&T storefrom3:30 a.m. to 11:30 a.m. before a stand-infromhis office literally stood in for the mayor while he conducted official business. And billionaire New York mayor Michael Bloomberg often waits for the subway with his fellow citizens, though hes first driven by motorcade past the stop nearest his house to a station 22 blocks away, where the wait, or at least the ride, is shorter.

　　As early as elementary school, were told that jumping the line is an unethical act, which is why so many U.S. lawmakers have framed the immigration debate as a kind of fundamental sin of the school lunch line. Alabama Senator Richard Shelby, to cite just one legislator, said amnesty would allow illegal immigrants "to cut in line ahead of millions of people."

　　Nothing annoys a national lawmaker more than a person who will not wait in line, unless that line is in front of an elevator at the U.S. Capitol, where Senators and Representatives use private elevators, lest they have to queue with their constituents.

　　But compromising the integrity of the line is not just antidemocratic, its out-of-date. There was something about the orderly boarding of Noahs Ark, two by two, that seemed to restore not just civilization but civility during the Great Flood.

　　How civil was your last flight? Southwest Airlines hasfirst-come, first-served festival seating. But for $5 per flight, anunaffiliated company called BoardFirst.comwill secure you a coveted "A" boarding pass when that airline opensfor onlinecheck-in 24 hours before departure. Thus, the savvy traveler doesnt even wait in line when he or sheis online.

　　Some cultures are not renowned for lining up. Then again, some cultures are too adept at lining up: a citizen of the former Soviet Union would join a queue just so he could get to the head of that queue and see what everyone was queuing for.

　　And then there is the U.S., where society seems to be cleaving into two groups: Very Important Persons, who dont wait, and Very Impatient Persons, who do--unhappily.

　　For those of us in the latter group-- consigned to coach, bereft of Flash Pass, too poor or proper to pay a placeholder --what do we do? We do what Vladimir and Estragon did in Waiting for Godot: "We wait. We are bored."

　　17. What does the following sentence mean? “Once the most democratic of institutions, lines are rapidlybecoming the exclusive province of suckers…Poor suckers, mostly.” (2 paragraph)

　　A. Lines are symbolic of America’s democracy.

　　B. Lines still give Americans equal opportunities.

　　C. Lines are now for ordinary Americans only.

　　D. Lines are for people with democratic spirit only.

　　18. Which of the following is NOT cited as an example of breaching the line?

　　A. Going through the customs at a Canadian airport.

　　B. Using Gold Flash Passes in amusement parks.

　　C. First-class passenger status at airports.

　　D. Purchase of a place in a linefroma placeholder.

　　19. We can inferfromthe passage that politicians (including mayors and Congressmen)

　　A. prefer to stand in lines with ordinary people.

　　B. advocate the value of waiting in lines.

　　C. believe in and practice waiting in lines.

　　D. exploit waiting in lines for their own good.

　　20. What is the tone of the passage?

　　A. Instructive.

　　B. Humorous.

　　C. Serious.

　　D. Teasing.

　　TEXT C

　　A bus took him to the West End, where, among the crazy coloured fountains of illumination, shattering the blue dusk with green and crimson fire, he found the café of his choice, a tea-shop that had gone mad and turned. Bbylonian, a while palace with ten thousand lights. It towered above the other building like a citadel, which indeed it was, the outpost of a new age, perhaps a new civilization, perhaps a new barbarism; and behind the thin marble front were concrete and steel, just as behind the careless profusion of luxury were millions of pence, balanced to the last halfpenny. Somewhere in the background, hidden away, behind the ten thousand llights and acres of white napery and bewildering glittering rows of teapots, behind the thousand waitresses and cash-box girls and black-coated floor managers and temperamental long-haired violinists, behind the mounds of cauldrons of stewed steak, the vanloads of ices, were a few men who went to work juggling with fractions of a farming, who knew how many units of electricity it took to finish a steak-and-kidney pudding and how many minutes and seconds a waitress( five feet four in height and in average health) would need to carry a tray of given weightfromthe kitchen life to the table in the far corner. In short, there was a warm, sensuous, vulgar life flowering in the upper storeys, and a cold science working in the basement. Such as the gigantic tea-shop into which Turgis marched, in search not of mere refreshment but of all the enchantment of unfamiliar luxury. Perhaps he knew in his heart that men have conquered half the known world, looted whole kingdoms, and never arrived in such luxury. The place was built for him.

　　It was built for a great many other people too, and, as usual, they were al there. It seemed with humanity. The marble entrance hall, piled dizzily with bonbons and cakes, was as crowded and bustling as a railway station. The gloom and grime of the streets, the raw air, all November, were at once left behind, forgotten: the atmosphere inside was golden, tropical, belonging to some high mid-summer of confectionery. Disdaining the lifts, Turgis, once more excited by the sight, sound, and smell of it all, climbed the wide staircase until he reached his favourite floor, whre an orchestra, led by a young Jewish violinist with wandering lustrous eyes and a passion for tremolo effects, acted as amagnetto a thousand girls, scented air, the sensuous clamour of the strings; and, as he stood hesitating a moment, half dazed, there came, bowing, s sleek grave man, older than he was and far more distinguished than he could ever hope to be, who murmured deferentially: “ For one, sir? This way, please,” Shyly, yet proudly, Turgis followed him.

　　21. That “behind the thin marble front were concrete and steel” suggests that

　　A. modernrealistic commercialism existed behind the luxurious appearance.

　　B. there was a fundamental falseness in the style and the appeal of the café..

　　C. the architect had made a sensible blendof old and new building materials.

　　D. the café was based on physical foundations and real economic strength.

　　22. The following words or phrases are somewhat critical of the tea-shop EXCEPT

　　A. “…turned Babylonian”.

　　B. “perhaps a new barbarism’.

　　C. “acres of white napery”.

　　D. “balanced to the last halfpenny”.

　　23. In its context the statement that “ the place was built for him” means that the café was intended to

　　A. please simple people in a simple way.

　　B. exploit gullible people like him.

　　C. satisfy a demand that already existed.

　　D. provide relaxation for tired young men.

　　24. Which of the following statements about the second paragraph is NOT true?

　　A. The café appealed to most senses simultaneously.

　　B. The café was both full of people and full of warmth.

　　C. The inside of the café was contrasted with the weather outside.

　　D. It stressedthe commercial determination of the café owners.

　　25. The followingare comparisons made by the author in the second paragraph EXCEPT that

　　A. the entrance hallis compared to a railway station.

　　B. the orchestrais compared to amagnet.

　　C. Turgiswelcomed the lift like a conquering soldier.

　　D. the interior of the caféis compared to warm countries.

　　26. The author’s attitude to the café is

　　A. fundamentally critical.

　　B. slightly admiring.

　　C. quite undecided.

　　D. completely neutral.

　　TEXT D

　　I Now elsewhere in the world, Iceland may be spoken of, somewhat breathlessly, as western Europe’s last pristine wilderness. But the environmental awareness that is sweeping the world had bypassed the majority of Icelanders. Certainly they were connected to their land, the way oneis complicatedly connected to, or encumbered by, family one can’t do anything about. But the truth is, once you’re off the beat-en paths of the low-lying coastal areas where everyone lives, the roads are few, and they’re all bad, so Iceland’s natural wonders have been out of reach and unknown even to its own inhab-itants. For them the land has always just been there, something that had to be dealt with and, if possible, exploited—the mind-set being one of landas commodity rather than land as, well, priceless art on the scale of the “Mona Lisa.”

　　When the opportunity arose in2003for the nationalpower company to enter into a 40-year contract with the Americanaluminum company Alcoa to supply hydroelectric power for a new smelter, those who had been dreaming of some-thing like this for decades jumped at it and never looked back. Iceland may at the moment be one of the world’s richest countries, with a 99 percent literacy rate and long life expectancy. But the proj-ect’s advocates, some of them getting on in years, were more emotionally attuned to the country’s century upon century of want, hardship, and colonial servitude to Denmark, which officially hadended only in 1944 and whose psychological imprint remained relatively fresh. For the longest time, life here had meant little more than a sod hut, dark all winter, cold, no hope, children dying left and right, earthquakes, plagues, starvation, volcanoes erupting and destroying all vegeta-tion and livestock, all spirit—a world revolving almost entirely around the welfare of one’s sheep and, later, on how good the cod catch was. In the outlying regions, it still largely does.

　　Ostensibly, the Alcoa project was intended to save one of these dying regions—the remote and sparsely populated east—where the way of life had steadily declined to a point of desperation and gloom. After fishing quotas were imposed in the early 1980s to protect fish stocks, many indi-vidual boat owners sold their allotments or gave them away, fishing rightsended up mostly in the hands of afew companies, and small fishermen were virtually wiped out. Technological advances drained away even more jobs previously done by human hands, and the people were seeing every-thing they had worked for all their lives turn up worthless and their children move away. With the old way of life doomed, aluminum projects like this onehad come to be perceived, wisely or not, as a last chance. “Smelter or death.”

　　The contract with Alcoa would infuse the re-gion with foreign capital, an estimated 400 jobs, and spin-off service industries. It also was a way for Iceland to develop expertise that potentially could be sold to the rest of the world; diversify an economy historically dependent on fish; and, in an appealing display of Icelandic can-do verve, perhaps even protect all of Iceland, once and for all,fromthe unpredictability of life itself.

　　“We have to live,” Halldór sgrímsson said in his sad, sonorous voice. Halldór, a former prime minister and longtime member of parliamentfromthe region, was a driving force behind the project. “We have a right to live.”

　　27. According to the passage, most Icelanders view land as something of

　　A. environmental value.

　　B. commercial value.

　　C. potential value for tourism.

　　D. great value for livelihood.

　　28. What is Iceland’s old-aged advocates’ feeling towards the Alcoa project?

　　A. Iceland is wealthy enough to reject the project.

　　B. The project would lower life expectancy.

　　C. The project would cause environmental problems.

　　D. The project symbolizes andendto the colonial legacies.

　　29. The disappearance of the old way of life was due to all the following EXCEPT

　　A. fewerfishing companies.

　　B. fewer jobs available.

　　C. migration of young people.

　　D. impostion of fishing quotas.

　　30. The 4 paragraph in the passage

　　A. sums up the main points of the passage.

　　B. starts to discuss an entirely new point.

　　C. elaborates on the last part of the 3 paragraph.

　　D. continues to depict the bleak economic situation.

　　PART III GENERAL KNOWLEDGE (10 MIN)

　　There are ten multiple-choice questions in this section. Choose the best answer to each question. Mark your answers on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　31. Which of the following statements in INCORRECT?

　　A. The British constitution includes the Magna Carta of 1215.

　　B. The British constitution includes Parliamentary acts.

　　C. The British constitution includes decisions made by courts of law.

　　D. The British constitution includes one single written constitution.

　　32. The first city ever founded in Canada is

　　A. Quebec.

　　B. Vancouver.

　　C. Toronto.

　　D. Montreal.

　　33. When did the Australian Federationofficially come into being?

　　A. 1770.

　　B. 1788.

　　C. 1900.

　　D. 1901.

　　34. TheEmancipation Proclamationtoendthe slavery plantation system in the South of the U.S. was issued by

　　A. Abraham Lincoln.

　　B. Thomas Paine.

　　C. George Washington.

　　D. Thomas Jefferson.

　　35. ________ is best known for the technique ofdramatic monologuein his poems..

　　A. Will Blake

　　B. W.B. Yeats

　　C. Robert Browning

　　D. William Wordsworth

　　36.The Financieris written by

　　A. Mark Twain.

　　B. Henry James.

　　C. William Faulkner.

　　D. Theodore Dreiser.

　　37. In literature a story in verse or prose with a double meaning is defined as

　　A. allegory.

　　B.sonnet.

　　C. blank verse.

　　D. rhyme.

　　38. ________ refers to the learning and development of a language.

　　A. Language acquisition

　　B. Language comprehension

　　C. Language production

　　D. Language instruction

　　39. The word “ Motel” comesfrom“motor + hotel”. This is an example of ________ in morphology.

　　A. backformation

　　B. conversion

　　C. blending

　　D. acronym

　　40. Language is t toolof communication. The symbol “ Highway Closed” on a highway serves

　　A. an expressive function.

　　B. an informative function.

　　C. a performative function.

　　D. a persuasive function.

　　Part IV Proofreading & Error Correction (15 min)

　　The passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way:

　　For awrongword,underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　For amissingword, mark the position of the missing word with a "∧" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　For aunnecessaryword,cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　EXAMPLE

　　When ∧ art museum wants a new exhibit,

　　it buys things in finished form and hangs

　　them on the wall. When a natural history

　　museum wants anexhibition, it must often build it.

　　So far as we can tell, all human languages areequally complete and perfect as instrumentsof communication: that is, every language appears to be well equipped as any other to say the things their speakers want to say.

　　There may or may not be appropriate to talk about primitive peoples or cultures, but that is another matter. Certainly, not all groups of people areequally competent in nuclear physics or psychology or the cultivation of rice or the engraving of Benares brass. Whereas this is not the fault of their language. The Eskimos can speak about snow with a great deal more precision and subtlety than we can in English, but this is not because the Eskimo language (one of those sometimes miscalled primitive) is inherently more precise and subtle than English. This example doesnot come to light a defect in English, a show of unexpected primitiveness. The position is simply and obviously that the Eskimos and the English live in similar environments. The English language will be just as rich in terms for similar kinds of snow, presumably, if the environments in which English was habitually used made such distinction as important.

　　Similarly, we have no reason to doubt that the Eskimo language could be as precise and subtle on the subject of motor manufacture or cricket if these topics formed the part of the Eskimos life. For obvious historical reasons, Englishmen in thenineteenth century could not talk about motorcars with the minute discrimination which is possible today: cars were not a part of their culture. But they had a host of terms for horse-drawn vehicles which sendus, puzzled, to a historical dictionary when we are reading Scott or Dickens. How many of us could distinguish between a chaise, a landau, a victoria, a brougham, a coupe, a gig, a diligence, a whisky, a calash, a tilbury, a carriole, a phaeton, and a clarence ?

　　PART VTRANSLATION (60 MIN)

　　SECTION A CHINESE TO ENGLISH

　　Translate the underlined part of the following text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　朋友關(guān)系的存續(xù)是以相互尊重為前提的, 容不得半點強求、干涉和控制。朋友之間, 情趣相投、脾氣對味則合、則交; 反之, 則離、則絕。朋友之間再熟悉,再親密,也不能隨便過頭，不恭不敬。不然，默契和平衡將被打破,友好關(guān)系將不復存在。每個人都希望擁有自己的私密空間，朋友之間過于隨便，就容易侵入這片禁區(qū)，從而引起沖突，造成隔閡。待友不敬，或許只是一件小事，卻可能已埋下了破壞性的種子。維持朋友親密關(guān)系的最好辦法是往來有節(jié)，互不干涉。

　　SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE

　　Translate the following text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　I thought that it was a Sunday morning in May; that it was Easter Sunday, and as yet very early in the morning. I was standing at the door of my own cottage. Right before me lay the very scene which could reallybe commandedfromthat situation, but exalted, as was usual, and solemnized by the power of dreams. There were the same mountains, and the same lovely valley at their feet; but the mountains were raised to more than Alpine height, and there was interspace far larger between them of meadows and forest lawns; the hedges were rich with white roses; and no living creature was to be seen except that in the green churchyard there were cattle tranquilly reposing upon the graves, and particularly round about the grave of a child whom I had once tenderly loved, just as I had really seen them, a little before sunrise in the same summer, when that child died. 我想那是五月的一個周日的早晨；那天是復活節(jié)，一個大清早上。我站在自家小屋的門口。就在我的面前展現(xiàn)出了那么一番景色，從我那個位置其實能夠盡收眼底，可是夢里的感覺往往如此，由于夢幻的力量，這番景象顯得超凡出塵，一派肅穆氣象。群山形狀相同，其山腳下都有著同樣可愛的山谷；不過群山挺然參天，高于阿爾卑斯峰，諸山相距空曠，豐草如茵，林地開闊，錯落其間；樹籬上的白玫瑰娟娟彌望；遠近看不見任何生物，唯有蒼翠的教堂庭院里，牛群靜靜地臥躺在那片郁郁蔥蔥的墓地歇息，好幾頭圍繞著一個小孩的墳墓。我曾對她一腔柔情，那年夏天是在旭日東升的前一刻，那孩子死去了，我如同當年那樣望著牛群。

　　PART VI WRITING (45 MIN)

　　Recently newspapers have reported that officials in a little-known mountainous area near Guiyang, Guizhou Province wanted to turn the area into a “central business district” for Guiyang and invited a foreigndesign company to give it a n entirely new look. Thedesign company came up with a blueprint for unconventional, super-futuristic buildings. Tis triggered off different responses. Some appreciated the bold innovation of the design, but others held that it failed to reflect regional characteristics or local cultural heritage. What is your view on this? Write an essay of about 400 words. You should supply an appropriate title for your essay.

　　In the first part of your writing you should state clearly your main argument, and in the second part you should support your argument with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary.

　　Marks will be awarded for content, organization, grammar and appropriateness. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your essay on ANSWER SHEET FOUR.

　　參考答案

　　1 tones of voice 2 huskiness 3 universal signal; 4 thought or uncertainty 5 indifference 6 honesty 7 distance; 8 situation; 9 mood; 10 unconsciously same posture

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　1. C2. A3. D4. A5. C

　　6. B7.C 8. D9. D 10. A

　　PART IIREADING COMPREHENSION

　　11.A 12.C 13.B 14.A 15.D

　　16.C 17.C18.A 19.D 20.B

　　21. A22.B23. B 24.B 25. C

　　26.A27.D 28.D 29.A30.C

　　31-35 DAAAC

　　36-40 DAACB

　　Part IV Proofreading & Error Correction

　　1 be后插入as; 2 their改為its; 3 There改為It; 4 Whereas改為But 5 further 改為much

　　6 come改為bring; 7 similar改為different; 8 will改為would; 9 as important去掉as; 10 the part去掉the

　　SECTION A CHINESE TO ENGLISH

　　Friends tendtobecome more intimated if they have the same interests and temper, they can get along well and keep contacting; otherwise they will separate andendthe relationship. Friends who are more familiar and closer can not be too casual and show no respect. Otherwise the harmony and balance will be broken, and the friendship will also be nonexistent any more. Everyone hopes to have his own private space, and if too casual among friends, it is easy to invade this piece of restricted areas, which will lead to the conflict, resulting in alienation. It may be a small matter to be rude to friends; however, it is likely to plant the devastating seeds. The best way to keep the close relationship between friends is to keep contacts with restraint, and do not bother each other.

　　SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE

　　我想那是五月的一個周日的早晨；那天是復活節(jié)，一個大清早上。我站在自家小屋的門口。就在我的面前展現(xiàn)出了那么一番景色，從我那個位置其實能夠盡收眼底，可是夢里的感覺往往如此，由于夢幻的'力量，這番景象顯得超凡出塵，一派肅穆氣象。群山形狀相同，其山腳下都有著同樣可愛的山谷；不過群山挺然參天，高于阿爾卑斯峰，諸山相距空曠，豐草如茵，林地開闊，錯落其間；樹籬上的白玫瑰娟娟彌望；遠近看不見任何生物，唯有蒼翠的教堂庭院里，牛群靜靜地臥躺在那片郁郁蔥蔥的墓地歇息，好幾頭圍繞著一個小孩的墳墓。我曾對她一腔柔情，那年夏天是在旭日東升的前一刻，那孩子死去了，我如同當年那樣望著牛群。

　　PART VI WRITING

　　The important role of a city’s local conditions in the urban design

　　Recently there is a hot debate on a report that a foreigndesign company invited by a little-known mountainous area in Guiyang provided a design without paying too much attention to the city’s unique characteristics. Some people appreciate the bold innovation of the design but others do not like it. In my opinion, any urban design should take the city’s original cultural heritage into account. The designers should suit their design to local conditions and try to take advantage of the local resources.

　　First, a city’s regional characteristics or local cultural heritage are its symbol, its identity. In a mountainous area, too many unconventional, super-futuristic buildings will notbe compatible with the city’s landscapes. Without these landscapes, it is just another so called moderncity composed of concrete and steel. Take Beijing for example. In the past few years, Beijing has been removing a large number of such alleys traditionally called hutong, in order to make itbecome a real international city. But without these hutongs can this city still be called Beijing, an ancient capital? The disappearance of hutongs means the disappearance of a period of history, a cordial lifestyle, and even the disappearance of Beijing itself. Then Beijing will lose its uniqueness.

　　Second, it can help a city save a lot of money by suiting the design to local conditions and try to take advantage of the local resources. This is especially important to small cities, like this one in a mountainous area near Guiyang. We all know Guiyang is a developing city, not very rich. Unconventional, super-futuristic buildings mean large need of money input. Then more burdens may be added to this city, which will run counter to the city’s original purpose of developing itself. Instead, if connections between a city’s culture and the various urban sectors, including housing, infrastructure and governance, are well made, the maximum economic benefits will be achieved.

　　Besides, the modernization should be a gradual process. More haste, less speed. Nonetheless, it should not be overlooked that theshortcomings of futuristic-style constructing outweigh its advantages brought.

　　In conclusion, any urban design should take the city’s original cultural heritage into account. The designers should suit their design to local conditions and try to take advantage of the local resources. A scientific city design should be dependent on the city’s regional characteristics, on a case-by-case basis.

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷7

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the mini-lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening to the mini-lecture,please complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE and write NO MORE THAN THREE WORDS for each gap. Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are) both grammatically and semantically acceptable. You may use the blank sheet for note-taking.

　　You have THIRTY seconds to preview the gap-filling task.

　　Now listen to the mini-lecture. When it is over, you will be given THREE minutes to check your work.

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　In this section you will hear ONE interview. The interview will be divided into TWO parts. At theendof each part, five questions will be asked about what was said. Both the interview and the questions will be spoken ONCE ONLY. After each question there will be a ten-second pause. During the pause, you should read the four choices of A, B, C and D, and mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　You have THIRTY seconds to preview the questions.

　　Now, listen to the Part One of the interview. Questions 1 to 5 are based on Part One of the interview.

　　1.A. Maggie’s university life.

　　B. Her mom’s life at Harvard.

　　C. Maggie’s view on studying with Mom.

　　D. Maggie’s opinion on her mom’s major.

　　2.A. They take exams in the same weeks.

　　B. They have similar lecture notes.

　　C. They apply for the same internship.

　　D. They follow the same fashion.

　　3.A. Having roommates.

　　B. Practicing court trails.

　　C. Studying together.

　　D. Taking notes by hand.

　　4.A. Protection.

　　B. Imagination.

　　C. Excitement.

　　D. Encouragement.

　　5.A. Thinking of waysto comfort Mom.

　　B. Occasional interferencefromMom.

　　C. Ultimately calls when Maggie is busy.

　　D. Frequent check on Maggie’s grades.

　　Now, listen to the Part Two of the interview. Questions 6 to 10 are based on Part Two of the interview.

　　6.A. Because parents need to be ready for new jobs.

　　B. Because parents love to return to college.

　　C. Because kids require their parents to do so.

　　D. Because kids find it hard to adapt to college life.

　　7.A. Real estate agent.

　　B. Financier.

　　C. Lawyer.

　　D. Teacher.

　　8.A. Delighted.

　　B. Excited.

　　C. Bored.

　　D. Frustrated.

　　9.A. How to make a cake.

　　B. How to make omelets.

　　C. To accept what is taught.

　　D. To plan a future career.

　　10.A. Unsuccessful.

　　B. Gradual.

　　C. Frustrating.

　　D. Passionate.

　　SECTION A MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

　　In this section there are three passages followed by fourteen multiple choice questions. For each multiple choice question, there are four suggested answers marked A, B, C and D. Choose the one that you think is the best answer and mark your answers on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　(1)There was musicfrommy neighbor’s house through the summer nights. In his blue gardens men and girls came and went like moths among the whisperings and the champagne and the stars. At high tide in the afternoon I watched his guests divingfromthe tower of his raft or taking the sun on the hot sand of his beach while his two motor-boats slit the waters of the Sound, drawing aquaplanes（滑水板）over cataracts of foam. On weekends Mr. Gatsby’s Rolls-Royce became an omnibus, bearing parties to andfromthe city between nine in the morning and long past midnight, while his station wagon scampered like a brisk yellow bug to meet all trains. And on Mondays eight servants, including an extra gardener, toiled all day with scrubbing-brushes and hammer and garden-shears, repairing the ravages of the night before.

　　(2)Every Friday five crates of oranges and lemons arrivedfroma fruiterer in New York – every Monday these same oranges and lemons left his back door in a pyramid of pulpless halves. There was a machine in the kitchen which could extract the juice of two hundred oranges in half an hour, if a little button was pressed two hundred times by a butler’s thumb.

　　(3)At least once a fortnight a corps of caterers came down with several hundred feet of canvas and enough colored lights to make a Christmas tree of Gatsby’s enormous garden. On buffet tables, garnished with glistening hors-d’oeuvre（冷盤）, spiced baked hams crowded against salads of harlequin designs and pastry pigs and turkeys bewitched to a dark gold. In the main hall a bar with a real brass rail was set up, and stocked with gins and liquors and with cordials（加香甜酒）so long forgotten that most of his female guests were too young to know onefromanother.

　　(4)By seven o’clock the orchestra has arrived – no thin five-piece affair but a whole pitful of oboes and trombones and saxophones and viols andcornets and piccolos and low and high drums. The last swimmershave come infromthe beach now and are dressing upstairs; the carsfromNew York are parked five deep in the drive, and already the halls and salons and verandas are gaudy with primary colors and hair shorn in strange new ways, and shawls beyond the dreams of Castile. The bar is in full swing, and floating rounds of cocktails permeate the garden outside until the air is alive with chatter and laughter and casual innuendo and introductions forgotten on the spot and enthusiastic meetings between women who never knew each other’s names.

　　(5)The lights grow brighter as the earth lurches awayfromthe sun and now the orchestra is playing yellow cocktail music and the opera of voices pitches a key higher. Laughter is easier, minute by minute, spilled with prodigality, tipped out at a cheerful word.

　　(6)The groups change more swiftly, swell with new arrivals, dissolve and form in the same breath – already there are wanderers, confident girls who weave here and there among the stouter and more stable,become for a sharp, joyous moment the center of a group and then excited with triumph glide on through the sea-change of faces and voices and color under the constantly changing light.

　　(7)Suddenly one of these gypsies in trembling opal, seizes a cocktail out of the air, dumps it down for courage and moving her hands like Frisco dances out alone on the canvas platform. A momentary hush; the orchestra leader varies his rhythm obligingly for her and there is a burst of chatter as the erroneous news goes around that she is Gilda Gray’s understudyfromthe Folies. The party has begun.

　　(8)I believe that on the first night I went to Gatsby’s house I was one of the few guests who had actually been invited. People were not invited – they went there. They got into automobiles which bore them out to Long Island and somehow theyended up at Gatsby’s door. Once there they were introduced by somebody who knew Gatsby, and after that they conducted themselves according to the rules of behavior associated with amusement parks. Sometimes they came and went without having met Gatsby at all, came for the party with a simplicity of heart that was its own ticket of admission.

　　(9)I had been actually invited. A chauffeur in a uniform crossed my lawn early that Saturday morning with a surprisingly formal notefromhis employer – the honor would be entirely Gatsby’s, it said, if I would attendhis “l(fā)ittle party” that night. He had seen me several times and had intended to call on me long before but apeculiar combination of circumstances had prevented it – signed Jay Gatsby in a majestic hand.

　　(10)Dressed up in white flannels I went over to his lawn a little after seven and wandered around rather ill-at-ease among swirls and eddies of people I didn’t know – though here and there was a face I had noticed onthe commuting train. I was immediately struck by the number of young Englishmen dotted about; all well dressed, all looking a little hungry and all talking in low earnest voices to solid and prosperous Americans. I was sure that they were selling something: bonds or insurance or automobiles. They were, at least, agonizingly aware of the easy money in the vicinity and convinced that it was theirs for a few words in the right key.

　　(11)As soon as I arrived I made an attempt to find my host but the two or three people of whom I asked his whereabouts stared at me in such an amazed way and denied so vehemently any knowledge of his movements that I slunk off in the direction of the cocktail table – the only place in the garden where a single man could linger without looking purposeless and alone.

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION

　　11.It can be inferred form Para. 1 that Mr. Gatsby ______ through the summer.

　　A.entertained guestsfromeverywhere every weekend

　　B.invited his guests to ride in his Rolls-Royce at weekends

　　C.liked to show off by letting guests ride in his vehicles

　　D.indulged himself in parties with peoplefromeverywhere

　　12.In Para.4, the word “permeate” probably means ______.

　　A.perish

　　B.push

　　C.penetrate

　　D.perpetrate

　　13.It can be inferred form Para. 8 that ______.

　　A.guests need to know Gatsby in order to attendhis parties

　　B.people somehowended up in Gatsby’s house as guests

　　C.Gatsby usually held garden parties for invited guests

　　D.guests behaved themselves in a rather formal manner

　　14.According to Para. 10, the author felt ______ at Gatsby’s party.

　　A.dizzy

　　B.dreadful

　　C.furious

　　D.awkward

　　15.What can be concludedfromPara.11 about Gatsby?

　　A.He was not expected to be present at the parties.

　　B.He was busy receiving and entertaining guests.

　　C.He was usually out of the house at the weekend.

　　D.He was unwilling to meet some of the guests.

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　(1)The Term “CYBERSPACE” was coined by William Gibson, a science-fiction writer. He first used it in a short story in 1982, and expanded on it a couple of years later in a novel, “Neuromancer”, whose main character, Henry Dorsett Case, is atroubled computer hacker and drug addict. In the book Mr Gibson describes cyberspace as “a consensual hallucination experienced daily by billions of legitimate operators” and “a graphic representation of data abstractedfromthe banks ofevery computer in the human system.”

　　(2)His literary creation turned out to be remarkably prescient（有先見之明的）. Cyberspace hasbecome shorthand forthe computing devices, networks, fibre-optic cables, wireless links and other infrastructure that bring theinternetto billions of people around the world. The myriad connections forged by these technologies have brought tremendous benefits to everyone who uses the web to tap into humanity’s collective store of knowledge every day.

　　(3)But there is a darker side to this extraordinary invention. Data breaches arebecoming ever bigger andmore common. Last year over 800m records were lost, mainly through such attacks. Among the most prominent recent victims has been Target, whose chief executive, Gregg Steinhafel, stood downfromhis job in May, a few months after the giant American retailer revealedthat onlineintruders had stolen millions of digital records about its customers, including credit- and debit-card details. Other well-known firms such as Adobe, atech company, and eBay,an onlinemarketplace, have also been hit.

　　(4) The potential damage, though, extends well beyondsuch commercial incursions. Wider concerns have been raised by the revelations about the mass surveillance carried out by Western intelligence agencies made by Edward Snowden, a contractor to America’s National Security Agency (NSA), as well as by the growing numbers of cyber-warriors being recruited by countries that see cyberspace as a new domain of warfare. America’s president, Barack Obama, said in a White House press release earlier this year that cyber-threats “pose one of the gravest national-security dangers” the country is facing.

　　(5)Securing cyberspace is hard because the architecture of theinternetwas designed to promote connectivity, not security. Its founders focused on getting it to work and did not worry much about threats becausethe network was affiliated with America’s military. As hackers turned up, layers of security,fromantivirus programs to firewalls, were added to try to keep them at bay. Gartner, a research firm, reckons that lastyear organizations around the globe spent $67 billion on information security.

　　(6)On the whole, these defenses have worked reasonably well. For all the talk about the risk of a “cyber 9/11”, theinternethas proved remarkably resilient. Hundreds of millions of people turn ontheir computers every day andbank online, shop at virtual stores, swap gossip and photos with their friends onsocial networks and sendall kinds of sensitive data over the web without ill effect. Companies and governments are shifting ever moreservices online.

　　(7)But the task isbecoming harder. Cyber-security, which involves protecting both data and people, is facing multiple threats, notably cybercrimeand onlineindustrial espionage, both of which are growing rapidly. A recent estimate by the Centre for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS), puts the annual global cost of digital crime and intellectual-property theft at $445 billion – a sum roughly equivalent to the GDP of a smallish rich European country such as Austria.

　　(8)To add to the worries, there is also the risk of cyber-sabotage. Terrorists or agents of hostile powers could mount attackson companies and systems that control vital parts of an economy, including power stations, electrical gridsand communications networks. Such attacks are hard to pull off, but not impossible. One precedent is the destruction in2010of centrifuges（離心機）at a nuclear facility in Iran bya computer program known as Stuxnet.

　　(9)But such events are rare. The biggest day-to-day threats facedby companies and governmentagencies comefromcrooks and spooks hoping to steal financial data and trade secrets. For example, smarter,better-organized hackers are making life tougher for the cyber-defenders, but the report will argue that even so a number of things can be done to keep everyone safer than they are now.

　　(10)One is to ensurethat organizations get the basics of cyber-security right. All too often breaches are caused by simple blunders, such as failing to separate systems containing sensitive datafromthose that do not need access to them. Companies also need to get better at anticipating where attacks maybe comingfromand at adapting their defences swiftly in response to new threats. Technology can help, as can industry initiatives that allow firms to share intelligence about risks with each other.

　　(11)There is also a need to provide incentives to improve cyber-security, be they carrots or sticks. One idea is to encourageinternet-service providers, orthe companies that manageinternetconnections, to shoulder more responsibility for identifying and helping to cleanup computers infected with malicious software. Another is to find ways to ensure that software developers produce code with fewer flaws in it so that hackers have fewer security holes to exploit.

　　(12)An additional reason for gettingtech companies to give a higher priority to security is that cyberspace is about to undergo another massive change. Over the next few years billions of new devices,fromcars to household appliances and medical equipment, will be fitted withtiny computers that connect them to the web and make them more useful. Dubbed “theinternetof things”, this is already making it possible, for example, to control home appliances using smartphone apps and to monitor medical devices remotely.

　　(13)But unless these systems have adequate security protection, theinternetof things could easilybecome theinternetof new things to be hacked. Plenty of people are eager to take advantage of any weaknesses they may spot. Hacking used to be about geeky college kids tapping away in their bedrooms to annoy their elders. It has grown up with a vengeance.

　　16.Cyberspace is described by William Gibson as ______.

　　A.a function onlylegitimate computer operators have

　　B.a representation of datafromthe human system

　　C.an important element stored in the human system

　　D.an illusion held bythe common computer users

　　17.Which of the following statements BEST summarizes the meaning of the first four paragraphs?

　　A.Cyberspace has more benefits than defects.

　　B.Cyberspace is like a double-edged sword.

　　C.Cyberspace symbolizes technological advance.

　　D.Cyberspace still remains a sci-fi notion.

　　18.According to Para. 5, the designing principles of theinternetand cyberspace security are ______.

　　A.controversial

　　B.complimentary

　　C.contradictory

　　D.congruent

　　19.What could be the most appropriate title for the passage?

　　A.Cyber Crime and Its Prevention.

　　B.The Origin of Cyber Crime.

　　C.How to Deal with Cyber Crime.

　　D.The Definition of Cyber Crime.

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　(1)You should treat skeptically the loud criesnow comingfromcolleges and universities that the last bastion of excellence in American education is being gutted by state budget cuts and mounting costs. Whatever else it is,higher education is not a bastion of excellence. It is shot through with waste, lax academic standards and mediocre teaching and scholarship.

　　(2)True, the economic pressures –fromthe Ivy League to state systems – are intense. Last year, nearly two-thirds of schools had to make midyear spending cuts to stay within their budgets. It is also true (as university presidents and deans argue) that relieving those pressures merely by raising tuitions and cutting courses will make matters worse. Students will pay more and get less. The university presidents and deans want to be sparedfromfurther government budget cuts. Their case is weak.

　　(3)Higher education is a bloated enterprise. Too many professors do too little teaching to too many ill-prepared students. Costs can be cut and quality improved without reducing the number of graduates. Many colleges and universities should shrink. Some should go out of business. Consider:

　　Except for elite schools, admissions standards are low. About 70 percent of freshmen at four-year colleges and universities attendtheir first-choice schools. Roughly 20 percent go to their second choices. Most schools have eagerly boosted enrollments to maximize revenues (tuition and state subsidies).

　　Dropout rates are high. Half or more of freshmen don’t get degrees. A recent study of PhD programs at 10 major universities also found high dropout rates for doctoral candidates.

　　The attrition among undergraduates is particularly surprising because college standards have apparently fallen. One study of seven top schools found widespread grade inflation. In 1963, half of the students in introductory philosophy courses got a B – or worse. By 1986, only 21 percent did. If elite schools have relaxed standards, the practice is almost surely widespread.

　　Faculty teaching loads have fallen steadily since the 1960s. In major universities, senior faculty members often do less than two hours a day of teaching. Professors are “socialized to publish, teach graduate students and spendas little time teaching (undergraduates) as possible,” concludes James Fairweather of Penn State University in a new study. Faculty pay consistently rises as undergraduate teaching loads drop.

　　Universities have encouraged an almost mindless explosion of graduate degrees. Since 1960, the number of masters’ degrees awarded annually has risen more than fourfold to 337,000. Between 1965 and 1989, the annual number of MBAs (masters in business administration) jumpedfrom7,600 to 73,100.

　　(4)Even so, our system has strengths. It boasts many top-notch schools and allows almost anyone to go to college. But mediocrity is pervasive. We push as many freshmen as possible through the door, regardless of qualifications. Because bachelors’ degrees areso common, we create more graduate degrees of dubious worth. Does anyone believe the MBA explosion has improved management?

　　(5)You won’t hear much about thisfromcollege deans or university presidents. They created this mess and are its biggest beneficiaries. Large enrollments support large faculties. More graduate students liberate tenured facultyfromundergraduate teaching to concentrate on writing and research: the source of status. Richard Huber, a former college dean, writes knowingly in a new book (“How Professors Play the Cat Guarding the Cream: Why We’re Paying More and Getting Less in Higher Education”): Presidents, deans and trustees ... call for more recognition of good teaching with prizes and salary incentives.

　　(6)The reality is closer to the experience of Harvard University’s distinguished paleontologist Stephen Jay Gould: “To be perfectly honest, though lip service is given to teaching, I have never seriously heard teaching considered in any meeting for promotion... Writing is the currency of prestige and promotion.”

　　(7)About four-fifths of all students attendstate-subsidized systems,fromcommunity colleges to prestige universities. How governors and state legislatures deal with their budget pressures will be decisive. Private schools will, for better or worse, be influenced by state actions. The states need to do three things.

　　(8)First, create genuine entrance requirements. Today’s low standards tell high school students: You don’t have to work hard to go to college. States should change the message by raising tuitions sharply and coupling the increase with generous scholarships based on merit andincome. To get scholarships, students would have to pass meaningful entrance exams. Ideally, the scholarships should be available for use at in-state private schools. All schools wouldthen compete for students on the basis of academic quality and costs. Today’s system of general tuition subsidies provides aid to well-to-do families that don’t need it or to unqualified students who don’t deserve it.

　　(8)Next, states should raise faculty teaching loads, mainly at four-year schools. (Teaching loadsat community colleges are already high.) This would cut costs and reemphasize the primacy of teaching at most schools. What we need are teachers who know their fields andcan communicate enthusiasm to students. Not all professors can be path-breaking scholars. The excessive emphasis on scholarship generates many unread books and mediocre articles in academic journals. “You can’t do more of one (research) without less of the other (teaching),” says Fairweather. “People are working hard – it’s just where they’re working.”

　　(10)Finally, states should reduce or eliminate the least useful graduate programs. Journalism (now dubbed “communications”), businessand education are prime candidates. A lot of what they teach can – and should – be learned on the job. If colleges and universities did a better job of teaching undergraduates, there would be less need for graduate degrees.

　　(11)Our colleges and universities need to provide abetter education to deserving students. This may mean smaller enrollments, but given today’s attrition rates, the number of graduates need not drop. Higher education couldbecome a bastion of excellence, if we would only try.

　　20.It can be concludedfromPara.3 that the author was ______ towardsthe education.

　　A.indifferent

　　B.neutral

　　C.positive

　　D.negative

　　21.The following are current problems facing all American universities EXCEPT ______.

　　A.high dropout rates

　　B.low admission standards

　　C.low undergraduate teaching loads

　　D.explosion of graduate degrees

　　22.In order to ensure teaching quality, the author suggests that the states do all the following EXCEPT ______.

　　A.set entrance requirements

　　B.raise faculty teaching loads

　　C.increase undergraduate programs

　　D.reduce useless graduate programs

　　23.“Prime candidates” in Para. 10 is used as ________.

　　A.euphemism

　　B.metaphor

　　C.analogy

　　D.personification

　　24.What is the author’s main argument in the passage?

　　A.American education can remain excellent by ensuring state budget.

　　B.Professors should teach more undergraduates than postgraduates.

　　C.Academic standard are the main means toensure educational quality.

　　D.American education can remain excellent only by raising teaching quality.

　　SECTION B SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

　　In this section there are eight short answer questions based on the passages in Section A. Answer each question in NO more than 10 words in the space provided on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　25.From the description of the party preparation, what words can you see to depict Gatby’s party?

　　26.How do you summarize the party scene in Para. 6?

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　27.What do the cases of Target, Adobe and eBay in Para. 3 show?

　　28.Why does the author say the task isbecoming harder in Para. 7?

　　29.What is the conclusion of the whole passage?

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　30.What does the author mean by saying “Their case is weak” in Para. 2?

　　31.What does “grade inflation” in Para. 3 mean?

　　32.What does the author mean when he quotes Richard Huber in Para. 5?

　　PART III LANGUAGE USAGE

　　The passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the following way:

　　For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a “∧” sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash “/” and put the word in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　Example

　　When∧art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an

　　it never buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never

　　them on the wall. When a natural history museum

　　wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3) exhibit

　　Proofread the given passage on ANSWER SHEET THREE as instructed.

　　PART IV TRANSLATION

　　Translate the underlined part of the following textfromChinese into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　流逝，表現(xiàn)了南國人對時間最早的感覺�！白釉诖ㄉ显唬菏耪呷缢狗颉！彼麄儼l(fā)現(xiàn)無論是潺潺小溪，還是浩蕩大河，都一去不復返，流逝之際青年變成了老翁而綠草轉(zhuǎn)眼就枯黃，很自然有錯陰的緊迫感。流逝也許是緩慢的'，但無論如何緩慢，對流逝的恐懼使人們必須用“流逝”這個詞來時時警戒后人，必須急匆匆地行動，給這個詞灌注一種緊張感。

　　PART V WRITING

　　The following two excerpts are about Ice Bucket Challenge, an activity initiated to raise money and awareness for the disease ALS (漸凍癥). From the excerpts, you can find that the activity seems to have achieved much success, but there have also been doubt and criticism.

　　Write an article of NO LESS THAN 300 words, in which you should:

　　1.summarize the development of ice bucket challenge activity, and then

　　2.express your opinion towards the activity, especially whether the problem found with this kind of activity will finally undermine its original purpose.

　　Marks will be awarded for content relevance, content sufficiency, organization and language quality.

　　Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your article on ANSWER SHEET FOUR.

　　Excerpt 1

　　ALS Ice Bucket Challenge Takes U.S. by Storm

　　In the last two weeks, the Ice Bucket Challenge has quite literally “soaked” the nation. EveryonefromEthel Kennedy to Justin Timberlake has poured a bucket of ice water over his or her head and challenged others do the same or make a donation to fight ALS within twenty-four hours.

　　Between July 29 and today, August 12, The ALS Association and its 38 chapters have received an astonishing $4 million indonations compared with $1.12 million during the same time period last year. The ALS Association is incredibly grateful for the outpouring of supportfromthose people who have been doused, made a donation, or both.

　　“We have never seen anything like this in the history of the disease,” said Barbara Newhouse, President and CEO of The ALS Association.

　　With only about half of the general public knowledgeable about amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), the Ice Bucket Challenge is making a profound difference. Since July 29, The Association haswelcomed more than 70,000 new donors to the cause.

　　“While themonetary donations are absolutely incredible,” said Newhouse, “the visibility that this disease is getting as a result of the challenge is truly invaluable. People who have never before heard of ALS are now engaged in the fight to find treatments and a cure for ALS.”

　　Excerpt 2

　　Ice bucket challenge: who’s pouring cold water on the idea?

　　The ice bucket challenge has certainly raised awareness. Whether that’s primarily of the disease for which it is raising funds or the speed at which images of swimsuit-clad celebrities will go viral is a long-term question. More pertinent right now is whether or not the craze has reached a tipping point.

　　As it lived by social media, so the ice bucket challenge could die by it. The state of California is currently experiencing one of the worst droughts on record. So gestures suchas companies dousing their staff en masse in hundreds of gallons of icy water, come across more as wasteful PR exercises than charitable gestures – and are being called out as such on Twitter.

　　There has been a similar reaction in China. Last week, protesters in drought-stricken Henan province raised empty red buckets over their heads,accompanied by the slogan “Henan, please say no to the ice bucket challenge”.

　　China’s ministry for civil affairs, while broadly supportive, has warned citizens against the practice’s “entertainmentand commercial tendencies”.

　　But the real dampener could be the risk of bodily harm. Doctors around the world have warned of risks to elderly people, expectant mothers and people with heart conditions.

　　PartⅠ LISTENING COMPREHENSION

　　1. the dialectical model

　　2. common and fixed

　　3. premises

　　4. opposition/arguing

　　5. arguments as performances/the rhetorical model

　　6. participating

　　7. convince

　　8. how we argue

　　9. tactics

　　10. negotiation and collaboration

　　11. they’re deadends

　　12. learning with losing

　　13. questions

　　14. achieve positive effects

　　15. be self-supported

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　1.What is the topic of the interview?

　　答案：C. Maggie’s view on studying with Mom.

　　2.Which of the following indicates that they have the same studyschedule?

　　答案：A. They take exams in the same weeks.

　　3.What do the mother and daughter havein common as students?

　　答案：D. Taking notes by hand.

　　4. What is the biggest advantage of studying with Mom?

　　答案：D. Encouragement.

　　5. What is the biggest disadvantage of studying with Mom?

　　答案：A. Thinking of waysto comfort Mom.

　　6.Why is parent and kids studying togethera common case?

　　答案：A. Because parents need to be ready for new jobs.

　　7.What would Maggie’s Mom like to be after college?

　　答案：C. Lawyer.

　　8.How does Maggie’s Mom feel about sitting in class after thirty years?

　　答案：D. Frustrated.

　　9.What is most challenging for Maggie’s Mom?

　　答案：C. To accept what is taught.

　　10.How does Maggie describe the process of picking out ones career path?

　　答案：B. Gradual.

　　PartⅡ READING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　11. It can be learnedfromPara. 1 that Mr. Gatsby through the summer.

　　答案：[A] entertained guestsfromeverywhere every weekend

　　12. In Para. 4, the word “permeate” probably means .

　　答案：［C］penetrate

　　13. It can be inferredfromPara. 8 that .

　　答案：［B］people somehowended up in Gatsbys house as guests

　　14. According to Para. 10, the author felt at Gatsby’s party.

　　答案：［D］awkward

　　15. What can be concludedfromPara. 11 about Gatsby?

　　答案：［A］He was not expected to be present at the parties.

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　16. Cyberspace is described by William Gibson as .

　　答案：［B］a representation of datafromthe human system

　　17. Which of the following statements BEST summarizes the meaning of the first four paragraphs?

　　答案：［B］Cyberspace is like a double-edged sword.

　　18. According to Para. 5, the designing principles of theinternetand cyberspace security are .

　　答案：［C］contradictory

　　19. What could be the most appropriate title for the passage?

　　答案：［A］Cyber Crime and Its Prevention.

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　20. It can be concludedfromPara. 3 that the author was towardshigher education.

　　答案：［D］negative

　　21. The following are current problems facing all American universities EXCEPT .

　　答案：［C］low undergraduate teaching loads

　　22. In order to ensure teaching quality, the author suggests that the states do all the following EXCEPT .

　　答案：［C］increase undergraduate programs

　　23. “Prime candidates” in Para. 10 is used as .

　　答案：［D］personification

　　24. What is the authors main argument in the passage?

　　答案：［C］Academic standards are the main means toensure educational quality.

　　SECTION B SHORT-ANSWER QUESTIONS

　　說明：這部分答案不是唯一，只要意思對了就可以。

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　25. From the description of the party preparation, what words can you use to depict Gatsby’s party?

　　答案：Gorgeous, luxurious and even extravagant.

　　26. How do you summarize the party scene described in Para. 6?

　　答案：Carnival crowds with changing groups and noisy jubilation.

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　27. What do the cases of Target, Adobe and eBay in Para. 3 show?

　　答案：The severe risksof commercial incursions in cyberspace.

　　28. Why does the author say that the task isbecoming harder in Para. 7?

　　答案：Because the multiple threats to cyber-security are growing.

　　29. What is the conclusion of the whole passage?

　　答案：As hacking grows, cyber-security is facing new threats.

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　30. What does the author mean by saying “Their case is weak.” in Para. 2?

　　答案：It’s hard for universities to be sparedfrombudget cuts.

　　30.31. What does “grade inflation” in Para. 3 mean?

　　答案：Grade represents a lower level of students’ performance.

　　32. What does the author mean when he quotes Richard Huber in Para. 5?

　　答案：Higher education fails in givingquality education to students.

　　Part IIILANGUAGE USAGE

　　1. in → over

　　2. ∧give→ that /which

　　3. differs→ differentiates或it→it

　　4. the→the

　　5.same→common

　　6. ∧intimate→and

　　7. it →which

　　8. than→than

　　9. base→preserve

　　10. furthermore→therefore

　　Part IV TRANSLATION

　　參考譯文

　　They have found that the flowing water, either a murmuring stream or a mighty river, passes quickly and never returns. With the passage of time, the youngbecome the old and the green grass turns yellow. People naturally have a sense of urgency to value every bit of time. As time goes by, no matter how slowly it elapses, people always use the word “l(fā)iushi” to warn the later generations for fear of time’s flowing away. They tell their descendants to treasure every single minute and make a hurried action, which adds a sense of tension to the word.

　　Part V WRITING

　　參考范文

　　Challenge or Not

　　Recently, the Ice Bucket Challenge has gone viral all over the world, particularly in the United States, with people posting videos ofthemselves onlineand on TV participating in the event. Despite the increase of the donation to fight ALS and more public concern, some are worried about the problems found with this kind of activities. What I have seen is that they have been ed a sense of entertainment. Personally, I propose that charitable activities, if ed with too much entertaining elements, will probably departfromtheir original intentions.

　　This charitable blockbuster, luring hundreds of celebrities, politicians and athletes, has sparked millions of donations to ALS research and raised awareness of the disease. However, there are worries and different voices towards it. Environmentalists are concerned about the waste of water on the national level, while doctors warn people of the risks of being poured by icy waterfromthe perspective of health.

　　On the one hand, we have observed that the ALS Ice Bucket Challenge has rubbed some people the wrong way, especially as participants get caught up in the act of making videos rather than focusing on the essence of the charity itself. It is said that when Barack Hussein Obama took the challenge, the current American president chose to make a donation of 100 dollars rather than pouring the icy water over his head. On the other hand, the original purpose of this activity is to provide aid and support for patients sufferingfromthe disease. Accordingly, what we should focus on is whether the ALS association begins immediate funding for families in desperate need of home health care services and other care-related services.

　　As a matter of fact, after a month in the spotlight, the much-hyped ALS Ice Bucket Challenge is finally starting to show signs of cooling down. Most things in moderation are healthy and lasting, and charitable activities are no different. We should always bear the core of charity in mind: being a dutiful citizen.

　　專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷8

　　PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSIONSECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the mini-lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening to the mini-lecture,please complete the gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE and write NO MORE THAN THREE WORDS for each gap. Make sure the word(s) you fill in is (are) both grammatically and semantically acceptable. You may use the blank sheet for note-taking.

　　You have THIRTY seconds to preview the gap-filling task.

　　Now listen to the mini-lecture. When it is over, you will be given THREE minutes to check your work.

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　In this section you will hear TWO interviews. At theendof each interview, five questions will be asked about what was said. Both the interviews and the questions will be spoken ONCE ONLY. After each question there will be a ten-second pause. During the pause, you should read the four choices of A, B, C and D, and mark the best answer to each question on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　You have THIRTY seconds to preview the choices.

　　Now, listen to the first interview. Questions 1 to 5 are based on the first interview.

　　1.A. Comprehensive. B. Disheartening. C. Encouraging. D. Optimistic.

　　2.A. 200. B. 70. C. 10. D. 500.

　　3.A. Lack of international funding.

　　B. Inadequate training of medical personnel.

　　C. Ineffectiveness of treatment efforts.

　　D. Insufficient operational efforts on the ground.

　　4.A. They canstart education programs for local people.

　　B. They can open up more treatment units.

　　C. They can provide proper treatment to patients.

　　D. They canbecome professional.

　　5.A. Provision of medical facilities.

　　B. Assessmentfrominternational agencies.

　　C. Ebola outpacing operational efforts.

　　D. Effective treatment of Ebola.

　　Now, listen to the second interview. Questions 6 to 10 are based on the second interview.

　　6.A. Interpreting the changesfromdifferent sources.

　　B. Analyzing changesfromthe Internetfor customers.

　　C. Using media information to inspire new ideas.

　　D. Creating thingsfromchanges in behavior, media, etc.

　　7.A. Knowing previous success stories.

　　B. Being brave and willing to take a risk.

　　C. Being sensitive to business data.

　　D. Being aware of what is interesting.

　　8.A. Having people take a risk.

　　B. Aiming at a consumer leek.

　　C. Using messages to do things.

　　D. Focusing on data-based ideas.

　　9.A. Looking for opportunities.

　　B. Considering a starting point.

　　C. Establishing the focal point.

　　D. Examining the future carefully.

　　10.A. A media agency.

　　B. An Internet company.

　　C. A venture capital firm.

　　D. A behavioral study center.

　　PART II READING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

　　In this section there are three passages followed by fourteen multiple choice questions. For each multiple choice question, there are four suggested answers marked A, B, C and D. Choose the one that you think is the best answer and mark your answers on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　(1) It’s 7 pm on a balmy Saturday night in June, and I have just ordered my first beer in I Cervejaria, a restaurant in Zambujeira do Mar, one of the prettiest villages on Portugal’s south-west coast. The place is empty, but this doesn’t surprise me at all. I have spent two weeks in this area, driving along empty roads, playing with my son on empty beaches, and staying in B&Bs where we are the only guests.

　　(2) No doubt the restaurant, run by two brothers for the past 28 years, is buzzing in July and August, when Portuguese holidaymakers descendon the Alentejo coast. But for the other 10 months of the year, the trickle of dinerswho come to feast on fantastically fresh seafood reflects the general pace of life in the Alentejo: sleepy, borderingon comatose.

　　(3) One of the poorest, least-developed, least-populated regions in western Europe, the Alentejo has been dubbed both the Provence and the Tuscany of Portugal. Neither is accurate. Its scenery is not as pretty and, apartfromin the capital Evora, its food isn’t as sophisticated. The charms of this land of wheat fields, cork oak forests, wildflower meadows and tiny white-washed villages, are more subtle than in France or Italy’s poster regions.

　　(4) To travel here is to step back in time 40 or 50 years. Life rolls along at a treacly pace; there’s an unnerving stillness to the landscape. But that stillnessends abruptly at the Atlantic Ocean, where there is drama in spades. Protected by the South West Alentejo and Costa Vicentina national park, the 100 km of coastlinefromPorto Covo in the Alentejo to Burgau in the Algarve is the most stunning in Europe. And yet few people seem to know about it. Walkers come to admire the viewsfromthe Fisherman’s Way, surfers to ride the best waves in Europe, but day after day we had spectacular beaches to ourselves.

　　(5) The lack of awareness is partly a matter of accessibility (these beaches are a good two hours’ drivefromeither Faro or Lisbon airports) and partly to do with a lack of beachsideaccommodation. There are some gorgeous, independent guesthouses in this area, but they are hidden in valleys or at theendof dirt tracks.

　　(6) Our base was a beautiful 600-acre estate of uncultivated land covered in rock-rose, eucalyptus and wild flowers 13km inlandfromZambujeira. Our one-bedroom home, Azenha, was once home to the miller who tended the now-restored watermill next to it. A kilometre awayfromthe main house, pool and restaurant, it is gloriously isolated.

　　(7) Stepping out of the house in the morning to greet our neighbours – wild horses on one side, donkeys on the other – with nothing but birdsong filling the air, I felt a sense of adventure you normally only get with wild camping.

　　(8) “When people first arrive, they feel a little anxious wondering what they are going to do the whole time,” Sarah Gredley, the English owner of estate, told me. “But it doesn’t usually take them long to realise that the whole point of being here is to slow down, to enjoy nature.”

　　(9) We followed her advice, walking down to the stream in search of terrapins and otters, or through clusters of cork oak trees. On some days, we tramped uphill to the windmill, now a romantic house for two, for panoramic views across the estate and beyond.

　　(10) When we ventured out, we were always drawn back to the coast – the gentle sands and shallow bay of Farol beach. At theendof the day, we would head, sandy-footed, to the nearest restaurant, knowing that at every one there would be acabinetfull of fresh seafood to choosefrom– bass, salmon, lobster, prawns, crabs, goose barnacles, clams … We never ate the same thing twice.

　　(11) A kilometre or sofromI Cervejaria, on Zambujeira’s idyllic natural harbour is O Sacas, originally built to feed the fishermen but now popular with everyone. After scarfing platefuls of seafood on the terrace, we wandered down to the harbour where two fishermen, in wetsuits, were setting out by boat across the clear turquoise water to collect goose barnacles. Other than them, the place was deserted – just another empty beauty spot where I wondered for the hundredth time that week how this pristine stretch of coast has remained so undiscovered.

　　11.The first part of Para. 4 refers to the fact that ______.

　　A.life there is quiet and slow

　　B.the place is little known

　　C.the place is least populated

　　D.there are stunning views

　　12.“The lack of awareness” in Para. 5 refers to ______.

　　A.different holidaying preferences

　　B.difficulty of findingaccommodation

　　C.little knowledge of the beauty of the beach

　　D.long distancefromthe airports

　　13.The author uses “gloriously” in Para. 6 to ______.

　　A.describe the scenery outside the house

　　B.show appreciation of the surroundings

　　C.contrast greenery with isolation

　　D.praise the region’s unique feature

　　14.The sentence “We never ate the same thing twice” in Para. 10 reflects the ______ of the seafood there.

　　A.freshness

　　B.delicacy

　　C.taste

　　D.variety

　　15.Which of the following themes is repeated in both Paras. 1 and 11?

　　A.Publicity.

　　B.Landscape.

　　C.Seafood.

　　D.Accommodation.

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　(1) I can still remember the faces when I suggested a method of dealing with what most teachers of English considered one of their pet horrors, extended reading. The room was full of tired teachers, and many were quite cynical about the offer to work together to create a new and dynamic approach to the place of stories in the classroom.

　　(2) They had seenpromises come and go and mere words werent going to convince them, which was a shame as it was mere words that we were principally dealing with. Most teachers were unimpressed by the extended reading challengefromthe Ministry, and their lack of enthusiasm for the rather dry list of suggested tales was passed on to their students and everyone was pleased when that part of the syllabus was over. It was simply a box ticking exercise. We needed to do something more. We needed a very different approach.

　　(3) That was ten years ago. Now we have a different approach, and it works. Here’s how it happened (or, like most good stories, here are the main parts. You have to fill in some of yourself employing that underused classroom device, the imagination.) We started with three main precepts:

　　(4) First, it is important to realize that all of us are storytellers, tellers of tales. We all have our own narratives – the real stories such as what happened to us this morning or last night, and the ones we have been told by others and we haven’t experienced personally. We could say that our entire lives are constructed as narratives. As a result we all understand and instinctively feel narrative structure. Binaryopposites – for example, the tension created between good and bad together with the resolution of that tension through the intervention of time, resourcefulness and virtue – is a concept understood by even the youngest children. Professor Kieran Egan, in his seminal book ‘Teaching as Storytelling’ warns us not to ignore this innate skill, for it is a remarkable tool for learning.

　　(5) We need to understand that writing and reading are two sides of the same coin: an author hasnot completed the task if the book is not read: the creative circle isnot complete without the reader, who will supply their own creative input to the process. Samuel Johnson said: A writer only begins a book. A reader finishes it. In teaching terms, we often forget that reading itself can be a creative process, just as writing is, and we too often relegate it to a means of data collection. We frequently forget to make that distinction when presenting narratives or poetry, and oftenask comprehension questions which relate to factual information – who said what and when, rather than speculating on ‘why’, for example, or examining the context of the action.

　　(6) The third part of the reasoning that we adopted relates to the need to engage the students as readers in their own right, not as simply as language learners; learning the language is part of the process, not the reason for reading. What they read mustbecome theirs and have its own special and secret life in their heads, a place where teachers can only go if invited.

　　(7) We quickly found that one of the most important ways of making all the foregoing happen was to engage the creative talents of the class before they read a word of the text. The pre-reading activitiesbecome the most important part of the teaching process; the actual reading part can almost be seen as the cream on the cake, and the principle aim of pre-reading activities is to get students to want to read the text. We developed a series of activities which uses clues or fragmentsfromthe text yet to be read, and which rely on the student’s innate knowledge of narrative, so that they can to build their own stories before they read the key text. They have enough information to generate ideas but not so much that itbecomes simply an exercise in guided writing; releasing a free imagination is the objective.

　　(8) Movingfrompre-reading to reading, we may introduce textual intervention activities. ‘Textual Intervention’ is a term used by Rob Pope to describe the process of questioning a text not simply as a guideto comprehension but as a way of exploring the context of the story at any one time, and examining points at which the narrative presents choices, points of divergence, or narrative crossroads. We don’t do this for all texts, however, as the shorter ones do not seem to gain muchfromthis process and it simply breaks up the reading pleasure.

　　(9) Follow-up activities are needed, at the least, to round off the activity, to bring some sense of closure but they also offer an opportunity to link the reading experience more directly to the requirements of the syllabus. Indeed, the story may have been chosen in the first place because the context supports one of the themes that teachers are required to examine as part of the syllabus – for example, ‘families’, ‘science and technology’, ‘communications’, ‘the environment’ and all the other familiar themes. There are very few stories that can’t be explored without some part of the syllabus being supported. For many teachers this is an essential requirement if they are to engage in such extensive reading at all.

　　(10) The whole process – pre-, while and post reading – could be just an hour’s activity, or it could last for more than one lesson. When we are designing the materials for exploring stories clearly it is isn’t possible for us to know how much time any teacher will have available, which is why we construct the activities into a series of independent units which we call kits. They are called kits because we expect teachers to build their own lessons out of the materials we provide, which implies that large amounts may be discarded. What we do ask, though, is that the pre-reading activities be included, if nothing else. That is essential for the process to engage the student as a creative reader..

　　(11) One of the purposes of encouraging a creative reading approach in the language classroom is to do with the dynamics we perceive in the classroom. Strategic theorists tell us of the social trinity, whereby three elements are required to achieve a dynamic in any social situation. In the language classroom these might be seen as consisting of the student, the teacher and the language. Certainlyfromthe perspective of the student – and usuallyfromthe perspective of the teacher – the relationship is an unequal one, with the language being perceived as placed closer to the teacher than the student. This will result in less dynamic between language and student than between language and teacher. However, if we replace ‘language’ with narrative and especially if that is approached as a creative process that draws the student in so that they feel they ‘own’ the relationship with the text, then this will shift the dynamic in the classroom so that the student, who has nowbecome a reader, is much closer to the language – or narrative – than previously. This creates a much more effective dynamic of learning. However, some teachers feel threatened by this apparent loss of overall control and mastery. Indeed, the whole business of openended creativity and a lack of boxes to tick for the correct answer is quite unsettling territory for some to find themselves in.

　　16.It can be inferredfromParas. 1 and 2 that teachers used to ______.

　　A.oppose strongly the teaching of extended reading

　　B.be confused over how to teach extended reading

　　C.be against adopting new methods of teaching

　　D.teach extended reading in a perfunctory way

　　17.The sentence “we all understand and instinctively feel narrative structure” in Para. 4 indicates that ______.

　　A.we are good at telling stories

　　B.we all like telling stories

　　C.we are born story-tellers

　　D.we all like listening to stories

　　18.Samuel Johnson regards the relationship between a writer and a reader as ______ (Para. 5).

　　A.independent

　　B.collaborative

　　C.contradictory

　　D.reciprocal

　　19.In Para. 7, the author sees “pre-reading” as the most important part of reading because _____.

　　A.it encourages students’ imagination

　　B.it lays a good foundation for reading

　　C.it can attract students’ attention

　　D.it provides clues to the text to be read

　　20.“Textual Intervention” suggested by Rob Pope (in Para. 8) is expected to fulfill all the following functions EXCEPT ______.

　　A.exploring the context

　　B.interpreting ambiguities

　　C.stretching the imagination

　　D.examining the structure

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　(1) Once again, seething, residual anger has burst forth in an American city. And the riots that overtook Los Angeles were a reminder of what knowledgeable observers have been saying for a quarter century: America will continue paying a high price in civil and ethnic unrest unless thenation commits itself to programs that help the urban poor lead productive and respectable lives.

　　(2) Once again, a proven program is worth pondering: national service.

　　(3) Somewhat akin to the military training that generations of American males received in the armed forces, a 1990s version would prepare thousands of unemployable andundereducated young adults for quality lives in our increasingly global and technology-driven economy. National service opportunities would be available to any who needed it and, make no mistake, the problems are now so structural, to intractable, that any solution will require massive federal intervention.

　　(4) In his much quoted book, “The Truly Disadvantaged,” sociologist William Julius Wilson wrote that “only a major program of economic reform” will prevent the riot-prone urban underclassfrombeing permanently locked out of American economic life. Today, we simply have no choice. The enemy within and among our separate ethnic selves is as daunting as any foreign foe.

　　(5) Families who are rent apart by welfare dependency, job discrimination and intense feelings of alienation have produces minority teenagers with very little self-discipline and little faith that good grades and the American work ethic will pay off. A military-like environment for them with practical domestic objectives could produce startling results.

　　(6) Military service has been the most successful career training program we’ve ever known, and American children born in the years since the all-volunteer Army was instituted make up a large proportion of this targeted group. But this opportunity may disappear forever if too many of our military bases are summarily closed and converted or sold to the private sector. The facilities, manpower, traditions, and capacity are already in place.

　　(7) Don’t dismantle it: rechannel it.

　　(8) Discipline is a cornerstone of any responsible citizen’s life. I was taught it by my father, who was a policeman. May of the rioters have never had any at all. As an athlete and former Army officer, I know that discipline can be learned. More importantly, it must be learned or it doesn’t take hold.

　　(9) A precedent for this approach was the Civilian Conservation Corps that worked so well during the Great Depression. My father enlisted in the CCC as a young man with an elementaryschool education and he learned invaluable skills that served him well throughout his life. The key was that a job was waiting for him when he finished. The certainty of that first entry-level position is essential if severely alienated young minority men and women are to keep the faith.

　　(10) We all know these are difficult times for the public sector, but here’s the chance to add energetic and able manpower to America’s workforce. They could be prepared for the world of work or college – an offer similar to that made to returning GI after Word War II. It would be a chance for 16- to 21-year-olds to live among other cultures, religions, races and in different geographical areas. And these young people could be taught to rallyaround common goals and friendships that evolve out of pride in one’s squad, platoon, company, battalion –or commander.

　　(11) We saw such images during the Persian Gulf War and during the NACC Final Four basketball games. In military lifeand competitive sports, this camaraderie doesn’t just happen; it is taught and learned in an atmosphere of discipline and earned mutual respect for each other’s capabilities.

　　(12) A national service program would also helpovercome two damaging perceptions held by America’s disaffected youth: the society just doesn’t care about minority youngsters and that one’s personal best efforts will not be rewarded in our discriminatory job market. Harvard professor Robert Reich’s research has shown that urban social ills are so pervasive that the upper 20 percent of Americans – the “fortunate fifth” as he calls them – have decided quietly to “secede”fromthe bottom four-fifths and the lowest fifth in particular. We cannot accept such estrangement on a permanent basis. And what better way to answer skepticsfromany group than by certifying the technical skills of graduatesfroma national service training program?

　　(13) Now, we must act decisively to forestall future urban unrest. Republicans must put aside their aversion to funding programs aimed at certain cultural groups. Democrats must forget labels and recognize that a geographically isolated subgroup of Americans – their children in particular – need systematic and substantive assistance for at least another 20 years.

　　(14) The ethnic taproots of minority Americans are deeply buried in a soil of faith and loyalty to traditional values. With its emphasis on discipline, teamwork, conflict resolution, personal responsibility and marketable skills development, national service can provide both the training and that vital first job that will reconnect these Americans to the rest of us. Let’s do it before the fire next time.

　　21.According to the author, “national service”is comparable to “military training” because they both cultivate youngsters’ ______.

　　A.good grades

　　B.self discipline

　　C.mutual trust

　　D.work ethic

　　22.The author cites the example of his father in order to show ______.

　　A.the importance of discipline

　　B.the importanceof education

　　C.the necessity of having strong faith

　　D.the effectiveness of the program

　　23.According to the author, a national service program can bring the following benefits to America’s youngsters EXCEPT ______.

　　A.increase inincome

　　B.a sense of responsibility

　　C.confidence and hope

　　D.practical work skills

　　24.According to the context, what does “the fire” refer to (Para. 14)?

　　A.Discrimination.

　　B.Anger.

　　C.Riots.

　　D.Aversion.

　　SECTION B SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

　　In this section there are eight short answer questions based on the passages in SECTION A. Answer each question in NO MORE THAN TEN WORDS in the space provided on ANSWER SHEET TWO.

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　25.What does Para. 2 tell us about the restaurant business on the Alentejo coast throughout the year?

　　26.According to Para. 5, what are the two main reasons of the Alentejo’s inaccessibility?

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　27.What does “It was simply a box ticking exercise” mean in Para. 2?

　　28.Paras. 4-6 propose three main precepts for the now approach. Please use ONE phrase to summarize each of the three precepts.

　　29.What does the author suggest to shift the dynamic in the classroom (Para. 11)?

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　30.What is the purpose of the program proposed by the author (Paras. 1-3)?

　　31.What does the word “it” in “Don’t dismantle it: rechannel it.” refer to (Para. 7)?

　　32.What do Robert Reich’s findings imply (Para. 12)?

　　PART III LANGUAGE USAGE

　　The passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the following way:

　　For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a “∧” sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash “/” and put the word in the blank provided at theendof the line.

　　Example

　　When∧art museum wants a new exhibit, (1)

　　it never buys things in finished form and hangs (2)

　　them on the wall. When a natural history museum

　　wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)

　　Proofread the given passage on ANSWER SHEET THREE as instructed.

　　PART IV TRANSLATION

　　Translate the underlined part of the following textfromChinese into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE.

　　我小的時候特別盼望過年，往往是一過了臘月，就開始掰著指頭數(shù)日子。對于我們這種焦急的心態(tài)，大人們總是發(fā)出深沉的感嘆，好像他們不但不喜歡過年，而且還懼怕過年。他們的態(tài)度令當時的我感到失望和困惑，現(xiàn)在我完全能夠理解了。我想長輩們之所以對過年感慨良多，一是因為過年意味著一筆開支，二是飛速流逝的時間對他們構(gòu)成巨大壓力。小孩子可以興奮地說：過了年，我又長大了一歲；而老人們則嘆息：嗨，又老了一歲。過年意味著小孩子正在向自己生命過程中的`輝煌時期進步，而對于大人，則意味著正向衰朽的殘年滑落。

　　PART V WRITING

　　The following are two excerpts about job hopping. Read the two excerpts carefully and write an article of NO LESS THAN 300 WORDS, in which you should:

　　1.summarize the main arguments in the two excerpts, and then

　　2.express your opinion towards job hopping, especially on whether job hopping would benefit your career development.

　　You can support yourself with informationfromthe excerpts.

　　Marks will be awarded for content relevance, content sufficiency, organization and language quality. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks.

　　Write your article on ANSWER SHEET FOUR.

　　Excerpt 1

　　The Pros of Job Hopping

　　Until recently, job hopping was considered career suicide. But things have changed. As job longevitybecomes a thing of the past, employers and recruiters are beginning to have a different outlook on job hopping.

　　According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the average number of years that . workers have been with their current employer is . Tenure of young employees (ages 20 to 34) is only half that years).

　　As it turns out, job hopping can be extremely advantageous for certain types of people – if they do it for the right reasons, says Laurie Lopez, a partner and senior general manager in the IT Contracts division at WinterWyman. “For those in technology, for example, it allows them the opportunity to gain valuable technical knowledge in different environments and cultures. This can bemore common for those specializing in IT. In order to keep their skills fresh, it is necessary for technologists to remain current in ahighly competitive market. Job hopping ismore common with employees that are less tenured, and feel confident in their skills to be able to move on and can add value immediately in a new opportunity. With employers being more open to hiring job hoppers, we expect the trendto continue.”

　　Excerpt 2

　　Job hoppingbecomes more difficult as employers seek solid credentials

　　Amid a slowdown in the country’s economic growth, the good times for job hoppers mightbe coming to anend, said Angel Lam, associate directorof commerce and finance, human resources, supply chain and operation business of Robert Walters.

　　Job hoppers are those who frequently change jobs in a two-year span, according to global recruitment consultancy Robert Walters.

　　Employers started to shun the job hoppers in2012, and the trendbecame more apparent in2013and this year.

　　“About 90 percent of our clients will simply reject the candidate if they find traces indicating job hopping in the resumes. They wouldn’t even give an interview,” she said.

　　The usual time span for candidates to change a job should be between four to six years, especially for middle to senior management candidates, as they have to demonstrate progress to their employers over this period of time, according to Lam.

　　Usually, the candidate will adapt to all the changes in the job in the first year, make some fine tuning in the second year, speed up his or her progress in the third year and start to seek more stable development in the ensuing years. Only in this way can the employee improve adaptability, gain persistence and grasp basic skill sets required for the job, Lam said.

　　PartⅠ LISTENING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MINI-LECTURE

　　1. signing

　　2. primary

　　3. literacy

　　4. differentbut complementary

　　5. avoiding

　　6. many other contexts

　　7. characteristics/features

　　8. reaction

　　9. distance

　　10. emotion

　　11. deliberate

　　12. intimacy and immediacy

　　13. continuum

　　14. types of language

　　15. the usage

　　SECTION B INTERVIEW

　　1.What is international leaders’ assessment of the current battle against Ebola?

　　答案：B. Disheartening.

　　2.How many people are now working in the treatment unit in Liberia?

　　答案：A. 200.

　　3.According to Mary, what is the challenge in the battle against Ebola?

　　答案：Insufficient operational efforts on the ground.

　　4.Why do health workers need case management protocol training?

　　答案：They can open up more treatment units.

　　5.What does this interview mainly talk about?

　　答案：Ebola outpacing operational efforts.

　　6.What is Tom’s main role in his new position?

　　答案：C. Using media information to inspire new ideas.

　　7.According to Tom, what does innovation require of people?

　　答案：B. Being brave and willing to take a risk

　　8.What does Tom see as game-changing chances in the future?

　　答案：B. Aiming at a consumer level.

　　9.What does Tom do first to deal with the toughest part of his work?

　　答案：D. Examining the future carefully.

　　10.Which of the following might Tom work for?

　　答案：A. A media agency.

　　PartⅡ READING COMPREHENSION

　　SECTION A MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　11. The first part of Para. 4 refers to the fact that .

　　答案：life there is quiet and slow

　　12. “The lack of awareness” in Para. 5 refers to .

　　答案：［C］little knowledge of the beauty of the beach

　　13. The author uses “gloriously” in Para. 6 to .

　　答案：［C］contrast greenery with isolation

　　14. The sentence “We never ate the same thing twice” in Para. 10 reflects the of the seafood there.

　　答案：［D］variety

　　15. Which of the following themes is repeated in both and 11?

　　答案：［A］Publicity.

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　16. It can be inferredfromand 2 that teachers used to .

　　答案：［D］teach extended reading in a perfunctory way

　　17. The sentence “we all understand and instinctively feel narrative structure” in indicates that .

　　答案：［C］we are born story-tellers

　　18. Samuel Johnson regards the relationship between a writer and a reader as .

　　答案：［B］collaborative

　　19. In , the author sees “pre-reading” as the most important part of reading because .

　　答案：［C］it can attract students’ attention

　　20. “Textual Intervention” suggested by Rob Pope (in Para. 8) is expected to fulfill all the following functions EXCEPT .

　　答案：［C］stretching the imagination

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　21. According to the author, “national service”is comparable to “military training” because they both cultivate youngsters’ .

　　答案：［B］self discipline

　　22. The author cites the example of his father in order to show .

　　答案：［A］the importance of discipline

　　23. According to the author, a national service program can bring the following benefits to America’s youngsters EXCEPT .

　　答案：［A］increase inincome

　　24. According to the context, what does “the fire” refer to (Para. 14)?

　　答案：［B］Anger.

　　SECTION B SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

　　說明：簡答題答案不唯一，意思對即可。

　　PASSAGE ONE

　　25.What does Para. 2 tell us about the restaurant business on the Alentejo coast throughout the year?

　　答案：Busy in July and August only.

　　(或者Not busy all the year other than July and August.)

　　26. According to Para. 5, what are the main reasons of the Alentejo’s inaccessibility?

　　答案：Farfromairports, and without properaccommodation.

　　PASSAGE TWO

　　27. What does “It was simply a box ticking exercise” mean in Para. 2?

　　答案：Extended reading was taught superficially without creation or enthusiasm.

　　28. Paras. 4 - 6 propose three main precepts for the new approach. Please use ONE phrase to summarize each of the three precepts.

　　答案：Teaching as storytelling, reading as creative processes, students as readers.

　　29. What does the author suggest to shift the dynamic in the classroom (Para. 11)?

　　答案：Replacing “l(fā)anguage” with narrative approached as an attractive creative process.

　　PASSAGE THREE

　　30. What is the purpose of the program proposed by the author (Paras. 1-3)?

　　答案：To help the urban poor lead quality lives.

　　31. What does the word “it” in “Don’t dismantle it: rechannel it” refer to (Para. 7) ?

　　答案：The resource of military bases suitable for national service.

　　32. What do Robert Reich’s findings imply (Para. 12)?

　　答案：There is alienation between the rich and the poor.

　　Part IIILANGUAGE USAGE

　　1. which→ that

　　2. thus→ as

　　3. how→ how

　　4. ∧the more→ and

　　5. specially→ especially/particularly

　　6. dominated→ dominating

　　7. make→ conduct/offer

　　8. ∧ability→ the

　　9. specialized→ specialize

　　10. manner→ way

　　Part IV TRANSLATION

　　參考譯文

　　The reasons for the elders’ mixed feelings about the New Year, I think, come down to the following two ones. On the one hand, celebrating the New Year means a great expense to them. On the other hand, the fleeting time exerted considerable pressure on them. Kids may say excitedly that they begin another year in their life after the New Year; however, adults may sigh, "Well, Ivebecome one year older!" For the kids, the New Year means that they are making progress in the most brilliant part of their life. On the contrary, for adults, its an indication that they are sliding into their declining years.

　　Part V WRITING

　　參考范文

　　Job Hopping, Yes or No?

　　It seems that employers are nowadays more open to job hoppers as the former is increasingly aware that job hopping may be conducive to them in thatfresh organizational cultures and values, especially the updated knowledge, are a must for the employees. However, some employers are reluctant to hire those job hoppers on the grounds that the latter needs at least four to six years to demonstrate progress to their employers and therefore, job hoppers who served ina company for less than that duration will do no good to both the present and the next employers. For those who are struggling for something new, they should not feel guilty about job hopping, but the trendof selecting what kind of employees by different businesses has to be pondered before the final decision is made.

　　The commonly accepted wisdom is that flexibility means adapting well to various circumstances and should be highly valued. In particular, venturing in new settings is not detrimental to personal characters in one’s early life. Job hopping will broaden one’s experience, escalate one’s knowledge and enrich one’s life. Additionally, job hopping may inspire smart decisions in choosing ideal jobs in the future. Apartfroma few who are definite towards their career life at a younger age, most young adults, especially those who have just stepped out of the ivory tower, are still not quite clear about their future. Job hopping will without doubt help new graduates find their true self and the direction of their careers. Furthermore, those loyal employees do have strengths suchas commitment, devotion and credibility to the job, but a higher risk of job burnout, mid-career crisis sabotage or severe career bottleneck are widely observed in workplace which may render stagnancy or even loss tothe company.

　　There is no question that to switch jobs should be done on the basis that the employee has really acquired skills in his or her present post and needs to further his or her knowledge or values. For those who frequently change jobs within a short period of time because they feel insecure or are sunk in apathy about the job or even problematic with addressing relationships with colleagues, it deserves reflection and the human resources department will for sure spot that out.

【專業(yè)英語八級歷年真題試卷】相關(guān)文章：

四級真題試卷歷年真題及答案10-11

資產(chǎn)評估基礎(chǔ)歷年真題試卷（精選5套）10-24

成人高考歷年真題試卷（精選7套）10-15

歷年自考真題10-22

小學教資考試歷年真題試卷（精選8套）11-08

英語專八歷年真題試卷匯總（精選7套）11-12

英語專業(yè)八級考試真題試卷（精選4套）11-12

自考00015《英語(二)》歷年真題試卷（通用5卷）09-30

2024年稅務(wù)師考試歷年真題試卷10-29